Anda di halaman 1dari 451

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG

INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding


© 02/2000

SchindlerEuroLift
INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg
with Scaffolding
Chapter Page

Prerequisites 2

Scope of Material 7

Preparation 9

Mechanical Installation Overview 11

Electrical Installation Overview 18

Adjustments & Finalizing Overview 22

Mechanical Installation Detail Instructions 27

Electrical Installation Detail Instructions 259

Adjustments & Finalizing Detail Instructions 397

H.R. Luchsinger, R&D-


Technical Review Heinz Völker, BLN Hans Elsener, PLM
Authorization Authored by: MQ
Chaired by: 02.10.2001
Released by:
03.10.2001
28.06.2001

Restrictions INVENTIO AG This design and information is our intellectual property. It must without our written consent neither be copied
CH- 6052 Hergiswil in any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated to third parties.

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on October 15, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Chapter 1 Prerequisites

Summary SchindlerEuroLift ® may be installed with machine room (MR) or without machine
room (MRL), with or without scaffolding and for weights up to 1000 kg or above
1000 kg.
In some countries local regulations do not allow installation without scaffolding.
This document K604124 (E) describes the installation procedures: up to 1000 kg,
MRL and with scaffolding.

Installation Weight [kg] Scaffolding Constellation Installation Document


Documentation
MRL K 604124
with
MR K 604125
≤ 1000
MRL (planned for December 2001)
without
MR (planned for December 2001)
MRL (planned for December 2001)
with
MR (planned for December 2001)
> 1000
MRL (planned for December 2001)
without
MR (planned for December 2001)

16.10.01 Page 2 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Safety No. Step


Procedures and
Requirements 101 Read and follow general and specific safety procedures.
The manufacturer of SchindlerEuroLift ® has laid down installation procedures as
safe as possible.
All protective means must be used and safety rules and regulations followed without
compromise to protect people as well as to prevent material damage and loss.
During work on a construction site, it is compulsory to use protective clothing and
equipment.
To obey the rules for work safety helps to ensure a correct execution of work and is
finally for your sake. Execute carefully all steps of the procedure as described in
this documentation. Always wear protective clothing and boots. A safety harness
and helmet must be worn when working in the hoistway. Protective leather gloves
are recommended when lifting heavy equipment.

1. Safety helmet
2. Protective goggles
3. Safety harness when
working in the hoistway
4. Protective boots
5. Protective leather gloves.

Protection Gear

Warning !
l Prevent devices and parts from falling.
l Protection means and measures must not be removed from the building site.
l Always use your personal protection gear (see illustration below):
l Observe rules and regulations about safety and accident prevention of the local
country.
l Install adequate lighting on the building site and namely in the hoistway.
l Follow tool installation and guidelines for their use.

16.10.01 Page 3 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Site Introduce the fitters to the building manager, explain the work plans, and
Introduction 102
clarify all necessary assistance for heavy material distribution.
Request access to locker room to change clothes and secure storage of
103
personal belongings.

Site Introduction

Building Check hoistway together with the building manager to assess working
104
conditions.
105 Request floor levels and building axis to situate landing doors.
106 Check pit for water, adaptation of actual building situation to dispo plans etc.
Determine location of el. power supply and make sure power tools are set to
107
correct voltage.
108 Ensure there is access to hoisting devices and scaffolding material.
109 Ensure necessary tools are available.

1. No water
2. Dimensional correctness
3. Plumb lines set
4. Electricity available
5. Light

Prerequisites

16.10.01 Page 4 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Electrical

At the beginning of the installation, only power for tools


and lighting is required.
110
Main power for the elevator is only needed to complete
the electrical installation and commissioning.

Electrical Prerequisites

Special Tools Apart the normal tools (as defined in "Toolbox") needed along a standard
mechanical & electrical installation, the following special tools are required:
Tools supplied with the components are not listed.

Component Tool/Method Figure Description

Torque Required for tightening the


wrench fastening screws

General
The hoisting gear with a
minimum loading capacity of
350 kg, is required for the
positioning of the heavy
Hoisting gear components e.g. to lift the
machine to hoistway top, and
for displacing the
counterweight when working
on its underside.

This tool is used for fixing


ropes in the hoistway -
Rope clip
unloading end rope
connections.

This tool is used for setting


Setting gauge Not available
alignment of guide rails.
Hoistway
Material
Wood blocks For positioning counterweight

To remove protruding edges on


Planer
the rails.

Nylon sling To lift the counterweight

3 grooved pulleys complete


with fixation material, to be

16.10.01 Page 5 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

fixed to the ceiling and the


hoistway wall as shown in the
layout drawing.
Pulleys Mat.No. 56014394 (available at
local Schindler organization)

2 guide rails T75 with modified


end, complete with 2 bolts
Installation M12;
rails Material No. 56014395,
available at the local Schindler
Organization.
Machine
PMS230 To grease the installation rails
Grease
T75
Steel rope min. length 9000
mm, min. dia. 8 mm, complete
with 4 rope clips to secure the
Lifting rope lifting rope to the suspension
devices at the machine.
(to be supplied by the local
Schindler Organization)
Rope of approx. length 3000
mm, to secure the machine
against swinging during lifting
Auxiliary rope
procedure
(to be supplied by the local
Schindler Organization)

For COP / Name Panel


COP Opening
Fixtures, MX installation to unlock locking
Tool
mechanism

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on October 08, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 6 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Chapter 2 Scope of Material

Summary In this chapter it is explained how to properly receive and distribute components
prior to SchindlerEuroLift ® installation.
-

Check Delivery No. Step


201 Check and ensure that the total number of pallets match the bill of shipment.
Check visually for external damages on packagings. In case of incomplete
202 shipment or evidence of external damages, please send a Quality Claim form
to the SchindlerEuroLift ® ELC immediately!
SchindlerEuroLift ® components may come in different shipments. Check:
203 l Date and time of arrival
l Evaluate whether all components have arrived on schedule.

Packaging is structured in assemblies with groups of different


204
components.
-

Equipment Ensure cases are placed in a clean, dry and protected area with the following
Storage precautions:
l No flammable materials lying around
l No work entailing gas cutting or any other flammable activities should take place
within the storage area.
l Case should be raised off of the slab in case of water
l Drains should not be blocked
l Low traffic area
l Protect from falling debris
l Cover with canvas or plastic sheeting that is tied down
l Builder should arrange security to prevent tampering or theft of the cases.
l If stacking is necessary, lighter cases should be placed on top of heavy cases.

The Construction Supervisor must ensure that cases are not opened for items
needed on other sites and then not closed up again. Any parts borrowed from the
site, no matter how small, must be signed for and a copy of an order or claim for the
needed part produced and kept in the job file. Delivery date of the borrowed part
must be acceptable to the installation program of this site.

The storage of equipment "off site" should be treated in exactly the same fashion as
set out above.

Warning !
n It is not permitted to place anything on top of the guide rails.
n At no time should lift equipment be stored out in the open. This will void the
supply warranty and put the KG at risk.
-

16.10.01 Page 7 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Handling and The placement of cases in storage must be planned so that once the
Prepositioning installation starts the cases are stored in the sequence that the equipment
205
will be needed. Equipment for the same lift should be stored together and not
mixed up with equipment from other lifts.

Warning !
n Extreme care must be taken when handling lift equipment on site to ensure that
no damage is caused to the equipment. Equipment especially, guide rails, must
not be dragged by mechanical means and the appropriate mechanical
equipment must be used to move heavy items.
n When heavy items are to be moved across slabs permission from the builder
must be obtained to ensure that, if the slab is green, it can support the
component mass. When necessary slabs will have to be propped underneath
to support equipment.
n Safe rigging principles are to be used at all times. The Construction Supervisor
should not allow inexperienced workers perform hoisting operations without an
experienced workman supervising the operation.
n Only appropriately maintained hoisting equipment can be used to hoist the lift
components. Sound slings and rigging equipment are a must and these should
be subject to regular checks by the Construction Supervisor.
n Do not handle weights exceeding the limit capacity of rail beam(s) and/or
hoisting tool(s)!

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on October 08, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 8 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Chapter 3 Preparation

Summary In this chapter preparatory activities are described or referred to where to find
appropriate details.
-

Position
No. Step
Scaffolding
301 Check that hoistway is clear of debris
Determine position of scaffolding so that it does not interfere with the plumb
302
lines and guide rails

Position Scaffolding
-

16.10.01 Page 9 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Scaffolding
303 Position timber on the pit floor to form level base for scaffold erection
304 Assemble scaffolding framework installing tie rods at intervals for stability
Observe safety precautions (e.g. erection of a safe working platform, ladders
305
and barriers)

Scaffolding Typical Access to Working Platform


-

Prepare No. Step Page


Hoistway
306 Measure main dimensions of hoistway
307 Clean layout pit set area and verify overall dimensions of layout
308 Set plumb lines
309 Create plumb table 24
310 Determine the precise hoistway head height
Cleaning of guide-rails (including to mount fishplates on one rail-end
311
and storing rails in pit-set).

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on October 08, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 10 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Chapter 4 Mechanical Installation

Summary SchindlerEuroLift ® can be installed with and without scaffolding. This chapter
describes the mechanical procedure for machine-room-less installation up to 1000
kg using scaffolding. Note that it is one (out of several) possible procedure.
-

Contents No. Section


4-1 Hoistway 12
4-2 Top of Hoistway 13
4-3 Counterweight 14
4-4 Landing Door C2 15
4-5 Landing Door T2 16
4-6 Car 17

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on October 08, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 11 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Section 4-1 Hoistway

Pit Set No. Step Page


401 Layout 27
402 Preinstallation 28

Guide Rail 403 Installation of guide rail fixing 36


Brackets,
Guide Rails 404 Installation of guide rails 47
405 Guide rail reinforcing 58

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on September 24, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 12 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Section 4-2 Top of Hoistway

Machine Support No. Step Page


406 Install and adjust machine support, secure all relevant screws. 59

Counterweight 407 Install counterweight suspension point. 65


Suspension
Point

Car Suspension Install car suspension point including overspeed governor


Point and GBP 408 72
suspension point (hitchplate).
Hitchplate

Machine 409 Install pulley for lifting machine to top of hoistway.


Mount two dampening pads and four lifting screws to machine 84
410
support
Lift machine (and place two installation rails on support) and slide
411 89
machine into position.
412 Fastening and grounding machine to support. 96

Frequency 413 Position converter to insure adequate air flow and room for cables. 101
Converter
414 Install supporting bracket and attach converter. 104

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on August 24, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 13 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Section 4-3 Counterweight

Buffer No. Step Page


Install buffer stand / 1. Variation (HSS1, 2 = 225 -1000 mm, OLEO
415 106
or ACLA)
416 Install buffer stand / 2. Variation (HSS 2 = 63 mm, OLEO) 110

Counterweight Take note about layout


417 113
SchindlerEuroLift® needs no oil reserves!
418 Pulley Suspension 117
419 Counterweight Frame
420 Install guide shoes
421 Install compensating chain 120
422 Fill counterweight with 1/2 or 2/3 of CW filler weight.
423 Pull up counterweight and fasten it on hitch plate.

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on August 23, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 14 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Section 4-4 Landing Door C2

Install Landing No. Step Page


Door
424 Install console. 129
425 Align consol. 130
426 Engage (snap) door frame with console. 131
427 Engage transom (door header) with door frame and bolt it. 132
428 Align door frame in both axis.
133
429 Set fixation angle to building in place.
430 Install sill and toe guard. 134
431 Set door panel in place. 135
432 Adjust door panel and transmission. 136
433 Engage transmission. 137
434 Adjust hoistway interlock. 138
435 Engage door unlocking device and check its function. 139
436 Install counter weight guide. 140
437 Bring the closing weight in position.
141
438 Check closing through counter weight.
439 Preassemble door frame (without transom).
142
440 Install box frame.

Control Cabinet
441 Install control cabinet in Overview 158
uppermost or 2nd-to-uppermost
442 Assembly and fixation 160
floor and install brake release
443 lever in control cabinet Insulation panels 165

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on August 24, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 15 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Section 4-5 Landing Door T2

Install Landing No. Step Page


Door
444 Install console. 144
445 Align console. 145
446 Engage (snap) door frame with console. 146
447 Engage transom (door header) with door frame and bolt it. 147
448 Align door frame in both axes.
148
449 Set fixation angle to building in place.
450 Install sill and toegard 149
451 Set door panel in place 150
452 Adjust door panel and transmission. 151
453 Engage transmission. 152
454 Adjust hoistway interlock. 153
455 Engage door unlocking device and check its function. 154
456 Bring the closing weight into position.
155
457 Check closing using counter weight.
458 Preassembly door frame (without transom) 156

Control Cabinet 459 Install control cabinet in Overview 158


uppermost or 2nd-to-uppermost
460 Assembly and fixation 160
floor and install brake release
461 lever in control cabinet Insulation panels 165

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on August 24, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 16 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Section 4-6 Car

Car Lower Parts No. Step Page


462 Install lower yoke (crosshead) with pulleys.
172
463 Adjust safety gear and guide shoes.
464 Install uprights and governor lever. 180
Old design 183
465 Install underslung suspension.
New design 187
466 Fasten compensating chain (lower yoke interfaces) 190
467 Install car platform. 192

Car Completion 468 Installation of Wall 195


469 Installation of Upper Part of the Car 201
470 Rubber 207
471 Resimix 208
472 Installation of Floor Covering StoneIt 209
473 Prerequisites for Wood Flooring 211
474 Wood Flooring 213
475 Sill with Toe Guard Installation 217
476 Front Wall Installation 222
477 Switch for car roof frame 227

Door Drive 478 T2 228


Install door drive and panels.
479 C2 235

Overspeed 480 Complete installation of overspeed governor GBP None


Governor

Suspension 481 Install suspension ropes 241


Ropes
482 Install ropes and rope retaining guard on machine 255

Hoistway Ladder 483 Install pit ladder. 257

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on August 23, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 17 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Chapter 5 Electrical Installation

Summary SchindlerEuroLift ® can be installed with and without scaffolding. This chapter
describes the electrical installation procedure including the commissioning for the
first run, for machine-room-less installation up to 1000 kg using scaffolding. Note
that it is one (out of several) possible procedure.
-

Contents No. Section


5-1 Control and Hoistway 19
5-2 Commissioning First Run 20
5-3 Fixtures and Sensors 21

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on October 08, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 18 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Section 5-1 Control and Hoistway

Hoistway No. Step Page


501 Install the cable ducts for wiring None
502 Mount the lighting None
503 Bring in the hoistway cabling (KTS, landing door). 259
504 Install building interface 265

Control Cabinet Place the Miconic MX-GC pcbs (5 modules, one with pcbs) in the
505 267
controller cabinet.

506 Install the modules. 268


Final wiring is done later during commissioning!

Mount bowden cable on the breake release lever in control cabinet


507 271
and connect to machine.
508 Connect electrical cables onto machine. 276
509 Connect electrical cables onto converter. 278
510 Lay cabling to control cabinet. None

Traveling Cable 511 Install traveling cable and connect. 285

Car Peripherals 512 Car wiring and OKR 287


and Cabling
513 Install hoistway information (AGSI, etc.) 291
514 Platform contacts None

Removing
Scaffolding 515 Remove scaffolding None
(can be done by building personnel).

Adjust and Wire 516 C2 293


Landing Door Adjust landing door
517 T2 294
518 Wire landing door None
519 KUET magnets
295
520 Halogen spots
521 Dock the landing- and the car C2 301
522 door and adjust them T2 304
523 Install Photocells 307

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on August 24, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 19 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Section 5-2 Commissioning First Run

Preparation of No. Step Page


Elevator Control
524 Prerequisites 310
525 Preparation of Elevator Control 312

Recall Travel 526 Prerequisites 317


with IMOF
527 Preconditions 319
528 Preparation in Cabinet 320
529 Parameterization Motor Control 321
530 Break Test 323
531 Motor Control Test Functions 324
532 Functional Checks 330

Inspection Travel 533 Preparation 331


with IMOF
534 Check Inspection Travel with IMOF 333
535 Preparation for Commissioning Door Drive 334

Further
536 Commissioning Varidor 30 335
Components
537 Commissioning Progard L 334

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on August 24, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 20 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Section 5-3 Fixtures and Sensors

Car and Landing No. Step Page


Operating Panels
538 COP Standard 346
539 COPs (MX -Fixtures) Name Panel 352
540 Key Switch Back Box 358
541 LOP 85 Flush 359
542 LOP 85 Surface 360
LOPs (MX-Fixtures)
543 LOP 128 Flush 634
544 LOP 85 Surface with Wall Box 366
545 LIPs (MX-Fixtures) 368
546 Terminal without Option Box 369
547 Terminal with Option Box 370
LOPs (Z-Line)
548 Option Box 373
549 Car Designation Plate 375
550 Positioning 377
551 COPs (Z -Line) Firefighting Unit 379
552 Terminal 380
553 Firefighting Unit 383
Commissioning Z-Line Car
554 Terminal 385
Elements
555 Destination Indicators 387

Load Measuring 556 Install load measurement device LONLMS-3 with X-Sensor
Device and Pit 390
Wiring 557 Wiring in the pit.

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on September 25, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 21 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Schindler EuroLift INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION MRL <1000 kg with Scaffolding
© 02/2000

Chapter 6 Adjustments & Finalizing

Adjust No. Step Page


Counterweight
601 Add weight to the CW. 397
602 Install compensation chain. 399
603 Install counterweight screen. 404

Car Decoration 604 Decorate stakes (optional) 409


605 Kick plates 411
606 Beams (optional). 413
607 Handrails (optional) 415
608 Car lining (optional) 417
609 Supports for deco celling 419
610 Car light 422
611 Deco ceilling 425

Final 612 Do final adjustments. None


Adjustments

Commissioning 613 Prepare Measuring Travel 427


Elevator Control
614 Carry Out and Verify Measuring Travel 428
615 Recall / Inspection Travel 431
616 Car I/O 432
617 Lift I/O 434
618 Completion Work Simplex 436

Commissioning 619 Prerequisites 437


Load
Measurement 620 Preparation 440
621 Basic Setting of Load Measurement 441
622 Additional Settings for LMS on Hitch Plate 442
623 Readjustment of Empty Car 443

Commissioning 624 Final Drive Adjustment 444


Frequency
Converter

16.10.01 Page 22 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Comissioning 625 Commissioning Servitel 446


Servitel

Complete 626 Commissioning Duplex 448


Comissioning
627 Commissioning Multiplex 450

Acceptance 628 Carry out acceptance test. K 604298


629 Official accpetance. K 603537

K 604124 E Version 01, released / Last edited on October 08, 2001

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

16.10.01 Page 23 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Chapter 3 Preparation

Summary This section contains information about preinstallation. The fitter must measure out
all dimensions of the hoistway in horizontal and vertical direction before installation
procedure.
-

Check of No. Step


hoistway in
horizontal 301 Measure out all important dimensions of the hoistway in horizontal direction.
direction

Mark Description
BS Hoistway width
BT Clear with of landing door
TS Depth of hoistway (unfinished)
Check of hoistway in horizontal direction
-

15.10.01 Page 24 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Check of 302 Measure out all important dimensions of the hoistway in vertical direction.
hoistway in
vertical direction

Dimension
Description
[mm]
HSG = 1400 (for VKN = 1 m/s)
HSG = 1500 (for VKN = 1,6 m/s)
Compare measurement of the hoistway pit depth with layout drawing.
HSG
If actual depth does not agree with the drawing, compensate with
suitable means such as concrete base or steel plates. Pit Set must be
supported in all length.
L = HSG+HQ+HK+457 (for VKN = 1 m/s)
L = HSG+HQ+HK+533 (for VKN = 1,6 m/s)
Measure and mark the dimension from hoistway pit bottom with
L
10 mm ( thickness of Pit Set) to above the triplet of free guide rails. If
actual dimension L does not agree with the drawing, adjustment of
hoistway pit is needful.
HQ Measure and mark the dimension of the travel height.
X = HK+457 (for VKN = 1 m/s)
X = HK+533 (for VKN = 1,6 m/s)
Measure the distance of the rail end from the top floor. If this
dimension does not agree with the drawing, adjustment of the
hoistway pit is needful.
X
The packet of distance washers is intended to enable realization of
the - 0 mm tolerance (+20/ -0) by compensating the minus tolerance (-
2 mm). If the rails are too high (outside of -0/ +20 tolerance given in
layout drawing), the fitter can make a correction by distance washers
and tapping rails down.
Y = min. 643 mm (for VKN = 1 m/s)
Y = min. 667 mm (for VKN = 1,6 m/s)
Y Measure distance from triplet of free guide rails to the hoistway
ceiling. If this dimension does not agree with the drawing, you have
adjust of hoistway ceiling.
Important dimensions of hoistway

15.10.01 Page 25 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Mark Description
HSG Depth of well pit
HQ Travel height
HK Car height clear up to sheet metal ceiling
VKN Rated speed of car
Important marks of check hoistway
-

Cleaning of guide rails

The all guide rails are supplied with protective film against rust till installation. This protective film must
be removed from the all guide rails before installation!
We use following procedure for removing of protective film from guide rails:
303 Clean all guide rails before installation into the hoistway.
304 Remove protective film from guide rails by means of benzin or synthetic diluent.
305 Follow your company guides on use (safety, application, disposal) of the cleaning product.
K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 26 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-1-1 Layout

Summary This section describes function and layout of the Pit Set. The Pit Set defines the
position of the guide rails during the installation process. The fixing for triplet guide
rails A, C, E is screwed by means of two anchor bolts to the floor. A special ALU -
section is used for the guides of the Pit Set. The position of the triplet guide rails A,
C, E is defined by the fixing. Other guide rails are able to change their position. The
buffers are fixed to the Pit Set and can be moved between the guide rails freely.
Two types of buffers can be used - OLEO and ACLA.
These exist two variations of the Pit Set according to the height of the buffer
support:
1. Variation: HSS1, 2 = 225 to 1000 mm (It is possible to use buffer type OLEO or
ACLA)
2. Variation: HSS2 = 63 mm (It is possible to use only buffer type OLEO)

HSS1 - Height of plinth underneath car


HSS2 - Height of plinth underneath counterweight
-

Layout This section describes the layout of the Pit Set in the hoistway without machine
room:

Mark Description
BKS Distance between guide rails of car
BGS Distance between guide rails of counterweight
Marks overview

K 604141 E Last edited on September 13, 2001 / version 02, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 27 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-1-2 Preinstallation

Summary This section describes the preinstallation instruction and an overview of the Pit Set
details. This chapter describes the installation of all guide rails to guides of the Pit
Set. Pit Set assembly - Mat. No. 56014354
-

Installation ALU - No. Step


section to the
fixing Screw stud bolts M8x90 [4] to the fixing [1]. Screw nuts M8 on stud bolts on
4001
half-length thread.
Put ALU - sections [2] on the pit floor to the fixing [1] and level in right
4002
directions.
4003 Put special bolts [5] into ALU-sections [2].
Put fixing sheets [3] and screw ALU-sections [2] on stud bolts [4] (see
4004
picture) and on special bolts [5] with washers and tight nuts.

The installation of ALU - sections to the fixing


-

15.10.01 Page 28 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Position in Install on ALU - sections gauge [1] by four special bolts with T-head M12x40
hoistway 4005
and washers [2].
Put assembled guides with fixing on the pit floor. Define the right position of
4006
the Pit Set in the pit.

Pit Set with gauge


-

15.10.01 Page 29 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of The pit has to be clean and oilproof painted and flat. Guide rails have to be
fixing with guide 4007
placed in the pit.
rail A
4008 Demount fixing sheet [7] and stud bolts M8 [8] from ALU - section and fixing.
Put always 10 pieces of distance washers [5] on the fixing [2] to place guide
4009
rail A [1].
Take the guide rail A [1] with the right length. The keyway has to have down
4010
direction. Fix the guide rail provisional to the wall.
Fix the guide rail ends to the fixing [2] by means of washers T75, T89 [4],
4011 bolts M12x35, washers and nuts [6]. Tight handily nuts.
In case of using guide rail T89/B it is needful to install washer T89/B [3]
Define the vertically position of the guide rail A and mark the correct position
4012 of the guide rail on the wall. Tight the bolts of guide rail fixings. Tight fast
nuts M12. For the right installation of the guide rail A - see section 4-2-2.

The installation of guide rail A


-

15.10.01 Page 30 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of 4013 Demount the fixing sheet and stud bolts M8 from ALU - section and fixing.
guide rail C on
fixing Put always 10 pieces of distance washers [5] on the fixing [1] to place the
4014
guide rail C [2].
Take guide rail C [2] with the right length. The keyway has to have down
4015
direction. Fix guide rail provisional to the wall.
Fix guide rail ends to the fixing [1] by means of washers T75, T89 [4], bolts
4016 M12x35, washers and nuts [6]. Tight handily nuts.
In case using guide rail T89/B is needful to install washer T89/B [3].
Define the vertically position of the guide rail C [2] and mark the correct
4017 position of the guide rail on the wall. Tight bolts of the guide rail fixings. Tight
fast nuts M12. The right installation of the guide rail C - see section 4-2-2.

The installation of guide rail C


-

15.10.01 Page 31 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of
guide rail E 4018 If Reinforcing the guide rails you have to have install it at first before the
installation of guide rail E (it is auxiliary guide rail of triplet guide rails).
Put always 10 pieces of distance washers [5] on fixing [1] to place of guide
4019
rail E [3].
Take guide rail E [3] with the right length. The keyway has to have down
4020
direction. Fix the guide rail provisional to the wall.
Fix guide rail ends to the fixing [1] by means of washers T75, T89 [4], bolts
4021 M12x35, washers and nuts [6]. Tight handily nuts.
In case using guide rail T89/B is needful to install washer T89/B [2].
Define the vertically position of the guide rail E and mark the correct position
4022 of the guide rail on the wall. Tight bolts of the guide rail fixings. Tight fast
nuts M12. The right installation of guide rail E - see section 4-2-2.

The installation of guide rail E


-

15.10.01 Page 32 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation guide Put zinc - coated sheet (it is used anti corrosion) [9] , steel flats [5] and
rail B, D 4023 special bolts [7] with washers into the ALU-sections [1]. Put clip T75, T89 [3]
on special bolts [7] and tight nuts.
4024 Put 10 pieces of distance washers [4] on the steel flat [5].
Take the guide rails [2] with the right lengths. The keyway has to have down
4025 direction. Install the guide rail [2] to clips T75, T89 [3] and provide it
vertically.
Fix guide rail ends to clips T75, T89 [3] by means of washers T75, T89 [6],
4026 bolts M12x35, washers and nuts [8]. Fix the guide rails provisional to the
wall. For the right installation of guide rails B, D - see section 4-2-2.

The installation of guide rail B, D


-

15.10.01 Page 33 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixation of fixing Drill holes for the anchor bolts M12x70 in the pit floor (by oblong holes in the
fixing). Fix the fixing [1] by means of two anchor bolts M12x70 [2] to the pit
floor. For the installation of anchor bolts - see section 4-2-1.
4027
Make fixation of the fixing after installation guide rails in all length of
hoistway. It is possible not to use anchor bolts - the fixing can stay free on
the pit floor.

The mounting of fixing to pit floor


-

15.10.01 Page 34 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Check Define the distance between car guide rails A, B (dimension BKS) and
dimensions BKS 4028 distance between counterweight guide rails C, D (dimension BGS) and mark
and BGS the vertically position of the guide rails. Tight bolts of the guide rail fixings.

The check of dimension BKS

The check of dimension BGS


-

Level of guide
rails
-

Warning After finishing the installation of car and counterweight it is possible to start
with the installation of the buffer - stands of the Pit Set. The buffers are
needful to guard from damage!
K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 35 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-2-1 Installation of Guide Rail Fixing

Summary This section contains installation instructions of guide rail fixings and position guide
rail fixings.
The guide rail fixings are supplied in different variations, as there one car guide rail
fixings (it is used SCHINDLER 300 - J 253667), counterweight guide rail fixings and
fixings of triplet guide rails. Sliding clips safes guide rails in horizontal direction. The
selection of guide rail fixing depends on enters data, which apply to hoistway
dimensions, car dimensions and interposition guide rails by layout drawings and
commission. The guide rail fixings are supplied in preinstalled condition.
-

15.10.01 Page 36 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of No. Step


plumb lines
4040 Measure out all important dimensions of the hoistway in horizontal direction.
4041 Install all plumb lines (see picture).

Mark Description
BK Width of car
BG Width of counterweight
BS Hoistway width
BT Clear with of landing door
SF Distance between wall and back of the guide rail
SG Distance between wall and back of the guide rail
Distance from hoistway front wall to centre line of car
TKSW
guides
TKF Distance between edge of car sill and guide rail axis
TS Depth of hoistway (unfinished)
The installation of plumb lines
-

15.10.01 Page 37 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Guide rail fixings Guide rail fixings are possible supplied in three ways:
types and 1) HALFEN - Guide rail fixings are supplied in preinstalled condition with connection
delivery material to the wall (anchor rail with clip bolt).
2) Anchor bolt - Guide rail fixings are supplied in preinstalled condition with
connection material to the wall (only anchor bolt).
3) Local - Guide rail fixings are supplied in preinstalled condition without connection
material to the wall. Connection material to the wall is supplied by customer.

Guide rail fixing for car guide rail - four types by dimension SF.

Fixing XS T75, T89

Fixing XM T75, T89

15.10.01 Page 38 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixing XL T75, T89

Fixing XL2-XL2

Guide rail fixing for counterweight guide rail - four types by dimension SG.

Fixing 1RA T75, T89

15.10.01 Page 39 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixing 1RB T75,T89

Fixing 1RC T75,T89

Fixing 1RD T75,T89

Guide rail fixing for triplet guide rails - four types by dimension SG.

15.10.01 Page 40 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixing 3RA T75, T89

Fixing 3RB T75, T89

15.10.01 Page 41 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixing 3RC T75, T89

Fixing 3RD T75, T89


-

15.10.01 Page 42 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixing to the There are two ways for connecting the guide rail fixings to the wall:
wall
1. Installation of guide rail fixings to the wall by means of anchor rails and clip
bolts (HALFEN):
Fix the guide rail fixings [1] to the anchor profile [2] in right position by plumb
4042
lines and screw by clip bolts M12 and nuts [3].

The fixing to the wall


It the concrete surface [1] is not even, you can shift it with washers [3]
4043
for the guide rail fixing [4] installation. This washers are not supplied.

Uneven concrete surface

2. Installation of the guide rail fixings to the wall by means of anchor bolts
(anchor bolts to concrete)
Define the axis of the guide rails on the wall and on the guide rail fixings. Put
the guide rail fixing on the wall so that the guide rail axis, which is defined on
4044
the wall, correspond with the guide rail axis defined on the guide rail fixing.
Define the position of the holes on the wall.

15.10.01 Page 43 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The fixing to the wall


Drill holes to the concrete wall. Fix fast the guide rail fixing to the wall by
4045
anchor bolts.

The installation of anchor bolts to the concrete

3. Installation of the guide rail fixing to the wall - Local


4046 It is possible to weld the rail fixing to the anchor rail.
It is possible to fix the guide rail fixing with special anchor bolts.
In this case it is needful to adhere to the instruction of special anchor
4047
bolts producer. The right installation is arranged by KG - Schindler
individually.

Defining the right holes for type of connection material:


Car guide rail fixing - same holes for both types of connection material.
Counterweight guide rail fixing - use 2x anchor bolts or 2x clip bolts.
Counterweight & Car guide rail fixing - use 2x anchor bolts or 2x clip
4048 bolts.
Use only one of the following fixing for mounting to the wall, of
others are not allowed.

15.10.01 Page 44 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Counterweight guide rail fixing

Car & Counterweight guide rail fixing

Level the right position of the guide rail fixing for the guide rail installation by
dimensions SG and SF. Release screws of the sliding clips and the first
4049
sliding clip rotate about 90°. The second sliding clip is needed dismounted.
Put the guide rail on the guide rail fixing. Tight fast nuts.

15.10.01 Page 45 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The level of guide rail fixings


Note Installation of Counterweight & Car Guide Rail Fixing:
In case, that is not possible to put out guide rail fixing in right dimension SG,
it is needful demount reinforcing from guide rail fixing.
Note All screw connections have to be fast tighten. For doing an internal
acceptance check, proceed according to the national regulations.
-

Right position of
last fixing

Right position of last fixing


K 604141 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 02, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 46 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-2-2 Installation of Guide Rails

Summary This section contains the installation instruction and the position of the guide rails
for guide rails in all length of the hoistway.
Guide rails are protected by oil film contrary to corrosive. It is needful to stock the
guide rails in a dry ambient before installing than on the building site.
-

15.10.01 Page 47 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Layout No. Step


Measure the basic dimensions and the right position of the guide rails with
4050
the guide rail fixing in the hoistway.

Mark Description
A Car guide rail of triplet guide rails
B Independent car guide rail
C Counterweight guide rail of triplet guide rails
D Independent counterweight guide rail
E Auxiliary guide rail of triplet guide rails
BKS Distance between guide rails of car
BGS Distance between guide rails of counterweight
SG Distance between wall and middle of counterweight guide rail
SF Distance between wall and back of the car guide rail
Layout description
-

Caution
All guide rails are supplied with protective film against rust till installation. It
is needful to remove protective film from guide rails before installation into
the hoistway. Next information see K 604141, chapter 3.

15.10.01 Page 48 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation first Fix the guide rails to the Pit Set by the end that have the keyway. See
piece of guide 4051
section 4-1-2.
rails

Pit Set - fixing of guide rails


-

15.10.01 Page 49 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation other Fix the first piece of the guide rail [1] to the fish plate [2] by two bolts,
pieces of guide 4052
washers and nuts [3]. Tight fast nuts.
rails

The fixing first guide rail to fish plate


Slip the other piece of the guide rail by the end with the keyway on the first
4053
guide rail (see picture).

15.10.01 Page 50 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The position of other guide rail


4054 Adjust the right position of the guide rails.
Fix the other guide rail to the fish plate by two bolts, washers and nuts. Tight
4055
fast nuts.

15.10.01 Page 51 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The fixing other guide rail to fish plate


4056 Repeat this way of installation for the next pieces of the guide rails.
-

15.10.01 Page 52 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation last Fix the last part of the guide rail to the fish plate by two bolts, washers and
piece of guide 4057
nuts. Tight fast nuts.
rails
4058 Last parts of guide rails have to finish with flat end, no key!

4059 In case of using guide rail T89/B - the last part of the guide rail has
to be without finished back side!

Last part of guide rail


-

15.10.01 Page 53 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Complete of This section describes the complete and basic dimensions of the guide rail in the
guide rail hoistway:

Pos./Mark Description
First guide rail. End of guide rail has to start by keyway. Use standard
1
lengths by layout drawing.
2 Guide rails with lengths by layout drawing.
3 Guide rail with special end - without key (see previous section)
4 Fixing of Pit Set
5 Machine Support
Ls Standard length 2500 mm or 5000 mm
Standard length or not standard length - by layout drawing and
L
commission
Lk Length depends on commission and layout drawing
Complete guide rail description
-

15.10.01 Page 54 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of Apply the guide rail to the guide rail fixings, rotate first sliding clip into basic
guide rails to 4060 position and install the second sliding clip. Tight nuts by - hand. Now the
guide rails guide rail should be safety against to come off the guide rail fixings.
fixings
Level the guide rail in vertical and horizontal direction. Check the right
4061
position in all length of the hoistway by gauge.

The insert of guide rail to guide rail fixing

Check the right position of guide rail A in dependency on distance from the
4062
plumb line.
Check the right position of guide rail B in dependency on car guide rail A.
4063
Check carefully the dimension BKS in all length of the guide rail.
4064 Check the right position of guide rail C opposite to car guide rail A.
Check right position of guide rail D in dependency on the counterweight
4065 guide rail fixing C. Check carefully dimension BGS in all length of the guide
rail.
Check right position of guide rail E opposite to car guide rail A and
4066
counterweight guide rail C.
Tight bolts fast, which connect the guide rail fixings. Tight bolts fast of the
sliding clips. Make sure, that the sliding clips right touchdown guide rail.
4067
Divergences in horizontal direction level carefully by hammer with using soft
washer.

15.10.01 Page 55 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The fixing of guide rail to guide rail fixing


-

15.10.01 Page 56 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Check of guide Check dimensions BKS and BGS between the guide rails in all length of the
rails after 4068
hoistway.
installation
4069 Check the right constriction of the screw connections.
Remove inequalities of the guide rail connections by special " file" (see
4070
picture).

The remove of inequalities of guide rails


-

Note It is necessary to grease the guide rails only for the first time. Further it is not
necessary to grease the guide rails, because material of sliding sleeves will
absorb the grease inside itself.
K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 57 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-2-3 Guide Rail Reinforcing

Summary This section describes the installation information of the reinforcing.


Use always the reinforcing, when guide bracket pitch is bigger than 2000 mm
(HF > 2000 mm).
HF - distances between guide rail fastening brackets.
This dependencies are identified by calculation and by instruction J 635445.
An assembly drawing for Reinforcing T75, T89 is document Z 43920016.
Warning If Reinforcing is used you have to install it before the installation of guide rail
E (it is auxiliary guide rail of triplet guide rail).
-

Installation of No. Step


reinforcing
4071 Prepare Reinforcing for installation.
Release bolts [3] of sliding clip [2], rotates the first sliding clip about 90° and
4072
the second sliding clip dismount.
Put in the Reinforcing [1] between the guide rails and situate the Reinforcing
4073
to the right position.
Rotate the sliding clip [2] to the basic position, install the second sliding clip
4074
[2] and tight nuts [3].

The installation of the guide rail reinforcing


K 604141 E Last edited on September 13, 2001 / version 02, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 58 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-3 Machine Support

Summary This section describes the installation of the Machine Support.


The installation of the Machine Support can be started, if guide rails are fixed
in the right position. The Machine Support is used for the installation of the motor.
The installation instruction of the gearless machine PMS 230 is document K
604131. The Machine support is supplied in pre-installed condition.
An assembly drawing for the Machine Support is document Z 43920061.
-

Installation of No. Step


Machine support
on triplet of Put the welded support [2] on triplet of guide rails A, C, E [1]. The top plate
4075
guide rails has to touch the ends of the triplet guide rails.

The stocking of Machine support on guide rails

15.10.01 Page 59 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fix the Machine Support [2] to the guide rails [1] by means of bolts M12x40
4076
(12x) [4], fixing plates (3x) [3] and washers (12x) [4] by hand.

The fixing of the Machine support on the guide rails

15.10.01 Page 60 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Check of Check the headway between the lower edge of Machine support and level of
distance 4077
the platform floor.

The check headway


-

15.10.01 Page 61 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Level of guide Take surplus distance washers according to level the length of guide rails by
rails 4078
means of pliers.

Clearance of surplus distance washers


-

15.10.01 Page 62 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Right position of The top plate has to be in horizontal position (in direction BGS and BKS).
Machine support 4079
Level Machine support [2] in horizontal direction by bubble [3].
Different levels of guide rail ends [1] have to be level by means of distance
washers [4], that are safety contrary motion by spring pin.
4080
Give in nuts of back bolts M12x100 before installation of distance
washers.

The level of the Machine support

Tight all bolts M12x40 (12x) by ring wrench. Provide the right position of
4081
bolts by safety wires.
4082 The Machine Support is ready for the installation of the motor.

The tighten bolts

15.10.01 Page 63 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Warning

The spring pin [1] is a very important component for the right function of the
Machine support. It is supplied from the producer. In case, that it isn't
supplied, is needful to get this pin before installation.
Spring - Type Straight Pin ISO 8752-6x24-A-ST, Mat. No. - 293197
-

Safety by wire

The safety wire overview


-

Assembly of
component

Machine support
K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 64 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-4 Counterweight Suspension Point

Summary This section describes information about installation of the Counterweight


Suspension Point. The end rope connections without spring for diameter rope
10 mm (Z 459116) are used for installation of ropes by document K 602488.
Installation of ropes by section 4 - 7.
An assembly drawing for Counterweight Suspension Point is document
Z 43920048.
-

15.10.01 Page 65 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Position of This section describes the position and basic dimensions of the Counterweight
Counterweight Suspension Point with the Machine Support in the hoistway :
Suspension Point
in the hoistway

Mark Description
SG Distance between wall and middle of counterweight guide rail
BGS Distance between guide rails of counterweight
TS Depth of hoistway (unifinished)
The position in the hoistway

The headroom of the hoistway


-

15.10.01 Page 66 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Warning The installation of the Counterweight Suspension Point can be started, if the
Machine Support is installed.
Installation
angle T75, T89
on guide rail D

No. Step
Install angle T75, T89 [2] on guide rail D [1] so that upper surface of guide
4083
rail and machine support should be in level.
Install angle T75, T89 [2] by means of bolts M12x40 with holes for safety
4084 wires [4], spring lock washers and fixing plate T75 (T89) [3] on guide rail D
[1].

The installation of angle T75, T89 on guide rail

15.10.01 Page 67 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

4085 Provide the right position of bolts by safety wires.

The safety bolts by wires


-

15.10.01 Page 68 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of Put washer 20 mm [4] on the machine support [2] and put washers 5 mm
yoke [5] and washers 1 mm [6] on guide rail D with angle T75, T89 [1] . Put the
4086
yoke [3] on the machine support [2] and on guide rail D with angle T75, T89
[1].
Screw the end of the yoke [3] on the machine support [2] by fixing plate [8],
4087
bolts M12x70, washers [7]. Do not tight.

The installation of yoke


-

15.10.01 Page 69 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Levelling of Level the yoke [1] to horizontal position (in direction BGS) by bubble [2].
yoke 4088
Reduce washers 1 mm [4] on occasion.
Put the fixing plate [5] into the yoke [1] and screw it by bolts [3] and
4089
washers. Tight fast all screw connections.

The levelling of yoke

4090 Provide the right position of bolts by safety wires.

The safety of bolts by wire

The safety wire overview


-

15.10.01 Page 70 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Assembly of
component

Counterweight Suspension Point - assembly


K 604141 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 02, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 71 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-5 Car Suspension Point


-

Summary This section contains installation information and overview details of the Car
Suspension Point . The Car Suspension Point is defined as the suspension point
for the ropes and at the same time it is suspension point for the overspeed
governor. The Car Suspension Point is checked on loading.
The Car Suspension Point is complete from two U beams in dependency on rated
load GQ.
For GQ ≤ 1000 kg is used U 160, U 200
Selecting U beams see document J 635452.
Installation of ropes by section 4 - 7.
An assembly drawing for the Car Suspension Point is document Z 43920040.
-

Assembly of
component

Car Suspension Point - assembly


-

15.10.01 Page 72 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Layout This section describes the position of the Car Suspension Point in the hoistway:

Mark Description
Distance from hoistway front wall to centre line of car
TKSW
guides
TS Depth of hoistway (unfinished)
Special dimensions
A B H
Mat. No. Description
[mm] [mm] [mm]
56014077 Car Suspension Point U 160 190 8 ± 10 270
56014078 Car Suspension Point U 200 210 18 ± 10 310
Dimensions overview

15.10.01 Page 73 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Position of Car This section describes the position of the Car Suspension Point for three types of
Suspension solutions - 1) Normal - without side niche, 2) Niche - with side niche and 3)
Point niche Deflecting pull of ropes - without side niche:
Level right position by bubble.
SF - Distance between wall and back of the car guide rail
1) Normal

Group Mat. No. Mat. No. U beam SF [mm]


56014077 U 160 114 ... 523
56014076
56014078 U 200 126 ... 523

The position without niche

15.10.01 Page 74 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

2) Niche

Group Mat. No. Mat. No. U beam SF [mm] B [mm]


56014077 U 160 73 ... 114 114 ... SF
56014076
56014078 U 200 73 ... 126 126 ... SF

The position with niche

15.10.01 Page 75 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

3) Deflecting pull of ropes

Group Mat. No. Mat. No. U beam SF [mm]


56014077 U 160 73 ... 114
56014076
56014078 U 200 73 ... 126
The position without niche
-

15.10.01 Page 76 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Caution No. Step


Before starting installation, check the dimension of delivered beams
according the following table or table which is slicked directly on the beam.
4091
In case of wrong delivery, send a Quality Claim Form and don't continue with
the installation of beams.
Check the
dimension of
delivered beams GQ [kg]
min ÷
max TS 320 450 630 800 1000 1275 1600
[mm]
1400 ÷
U-160 U-160 U-160 U-160 U-160
1700
1701 ÷
U-160 U-160 U-160 U-160 U-160 U-200
1840
1841 ÷ U-160 U-160 U-160 U-160 U-200 U-200
1950
1951 ÷ U-160 U-160 U-160 U-160 U-200 U-200 U-200
2150
2151 ÷ U-160 U-160 U-160 U-200 U-200 U-200 U-200
2200
2201 ÷ U-160 U-160 U-160 U-200 U-200 U-200 U-240
2630
2631 ÷ U-160 U-160 U-160 U-200 U-200 U-240 U-240
2650
2651 ÷ U-160 U-160 U-160 U-200 U-200 U-240 U-240
3250

Choice of beam for car fix point


-

Transport of
beams to
headroom of
hoistway

The transport of beams


-

15.10.01 Page 77 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of No. Step


beams to the
niche The hoistway has to be prepared for the installation of the Car
4092
Suspension Point to the niche.
4093 Put in rubber plates [2] on both sides to the niche.
Put in U beams [1] to the niche on rubber plates [2] and level them in the
4094
right dimension.

The position of beams in the niche

Clips are supplied in necessary number (usually 4) and apply to


determination the position of U beams [1]. Apply clips III [2] on U beams [1]
4095
and screw by means of stud bolts M12x320 (for U 160, U 200) or stud bolts
M12x360 (for U 240) with nuts and washers [3]. Do not tight.

The fixation of clips on beam

15.10.01 Page 78 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation Use clip I with spacing of holes 320 mm [2]. Level clip I in face of guide rail
suspension 4096
in horizontal direction (see layout).
overspeed
governor GBP Put in threaded rods M24 [3] to clip I and fix them by means of nuts and
4097 safety them by split pins in the upper part of the U beam [1]. Fix the bottom
part of clip I by nuts and tight fast.

The fixing of clips I


Install support profile [3] on threaded rods with nuts [2] in the right position
4098
(see layout).
Level the right position of the support profile [3] by bubble. Tight fast nuts
4099
and safety them by split pins [2].
The suspension point of the overspeed governor GBP is ready for
4100
installation of the overspeed governor body.

The installation of suspension point GBP


-

15.10.01 Page 79 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation rope Put clip II [1] on the U - Beams in the upper part. Put clip III [2] with angle
suspension point 4101 LMS [3] under the U - beams and screw this clips together by stud bolt,
washers and nuts [4]. Do not tight.
Level clips in face of guide rail in horizontal direction (see layout). Tight fast
4102
nuts.
Put two threaded rods M24 to clips and fix them by spherical washers,
4103 conical seats, nuts and safety split pins [5] in the upper part.
Oil slightly conical seats by vaseline grease.

The installation of clips

Clip II, which is used for the suspension rope point has to be
4104 installed with the groove facing to the wall of the hoistway. Clip II is a
special design for using different U - beams. Threaded rods M24 at
motion should not touch the U - beam.

15.10.01 Page 80 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Clip II

4105 Fix spring pin to U - profile.

The installation of split pin

Install plate LMS [3] with U - profile [2] on threaded rods M24 [4]. Abide
4106 right dimension by picture (see layout). Fix threaded rods by nuts and safety
by split pins [4].

15.10.01 Page 81 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The installation U - profile with plate LMS


-

15.10.01 Page 82 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixing U - beams 4107 Level U beams [1] right all over lengths.
to the wall
4108 Drill holes for anchor bolts to the wall.
Install angle [9] to the wall by means of anchor bolts [16] on dimensions by
4109
picture.
Fix clips III [4] with stud bolts [13] to the oblong holes of angles [9]. Tight
4110
fast nuts.

The installation of anchor bolts

The installation of U - beams to the niche

The position of fixing to the niche


K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 83 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Gearless Machine PMS230 INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 11/1999

Section 3-1-1 Preparations

Unwrap the machine only short before starting the installation procedure to
avoid any soiling or damage.

Tools and Tool / Material Figure Description


Material
2 rods with holes, to be screwed in at both
Suspension
sides of the machine)
device
(included in supply if ordered with machine
(MRL) from SDS; Mat.No. 127199

3 grooved pulleys complete with fixation


material, to be fixed to the ceiling and the
Pulleys hoistway wall as shown in the layout
(MRL) drawing.
Mat.No. 56014394 (available at local
Schindler organization)

2 damping pads, to be installed onto the


Damping pads machine support.
(MRL) Mat.No. 127194 (included in machine
supply)

4 damping pads complete with fastening


Damping pads material, to be installed onto the drive
frame.
(MR) Mat.No. 911134 (included in machine
supply)
Hex Head 4 screws to push the machine upwards
screws M12x90, during the installation procedure.
fully threaded Mat.No. 293398 (included in machine
(MRL) support supply)
Special tools and material required for the installation preparations
-

15.10.01 Page 84 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixing Pulleys to No. Step


Hoistway Ceiling
Fix two pulleys to the fixation points A and B provided at the hoistway ceiling
as shown in the layout drawing.
301 l Take care to check the fixation points for sufficient load bearing
capacity: min. 350 kg at each point.
l Make sure that the fixation screws are firmly seated.

Position of fixation points for the pulleys


-

Checking Ensure that the machine support [1] is equipped with four bolts [2] with
Machine Support distance tubes.
302
These bolts are used to align the installation rails. Do not remove
them.

Machine support equipped with four bolts


-

15.10.01 Page 85 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Damping pads Place the two damping pads [1] on the machine support, so that the the two
pins [2] at the bottom of the pads fit into the holes [3] in the support.
303
The pads are fastened by screws only after the machine is positioned
on the support
Check the correct position of the damping pads: The pads must not project
304
over the edges of the machine support
Screw in the four screws M12x90 [4] so that their points are ca. 35 mm above
the damping pads. Slightly grease the points.
305
The screws are used to lower and lift the machine for exact
positioning.

Installing the damping pads


-

Caution !
The fixation point at the hoistway wall (anchoring) must withstand a minimal
horizontal load F1 of 10 kN (safety factor SF = 2.5).
-

15.10.01 Page 86 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixing Pulley at Fix the third pulley [6] to the hoistway wall (see Section 3-1-2, picture How
Hoistway Wall the machine is lifted to the hoistway ceiling) so that it is approx. 500 mm
306 above floor level of the floor below.
Make sure that the fixation screws are firmly seated.

Fixation point for the pulley (6) at the hoistway wall


-

15.10.01 Page 87 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Preparing the 307 Unwrap machine.


Machine
Remove the plugs [1] at both sides of the machine.
308 Keep the plugs for re-inserting in case that the suspension devices [2]
have to be removed after installing the machine has been completed.
Fasten the two suspension devices [2] by using the three hex screws [4] so
that the holes [3] direct upwards. Make sure that the screws are firmly
309 seated.
Keep the nuts for securing the screws if the suspension devices have
to be removed.

Removing the protective plugs and fitting the suspension devices to the machine
Version 01-0, final release / Last edited on July 23, 2001
K 604131 E
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 88 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Gearless Machine PMS230 INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 11/1999

Section 3-1-2 Lifting and Positioning the Machine


-

Danger !
Always observe the instructions of the supervisor and the special local regulations
for accident prevention.
In addition, observe the following precautions specific for the installation procedure
in the hoistway:
n Make sure that the scaffolding or installation platform and the fixation points for
the lifting procedure meet the load bearing requirements stated in Chapter 1
Prerequisites, Building.
n Always transport the machine in horizontal position.
n Never stay under the suspended machine.
n Always wear helmet, protective clothing and gloves (see image below).
n Take precautions to prevent loose parts or tools from falling down the hoistway
(risk of injury for field personnel working in the hoistway).

A full body safety harness is mandatory for work on elevations 2 m and more
above the next level and with horizontal free distance of 400 mm and more.
Number Description
1 Helmet
2 Safety glasses
Safety harness when working on
3
platform in the hoistway
4 Protective boots
5 Protective leather gloves
Protective Equipment

15.10.01 Page 89 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Tools and Tool / Material Figure Description


Material

2 guide rails T75 with modified end,


Installation rails complete with 2 bolts M12;
(MRL) Material No. 56014395, available at the local
Schindler Organization.

Grease
To grease the installation rails T75
(MRL)
Steel rope min. length 9000 mm, min. dia. 8
mm, complete with 4 rope clips to secure the
Lifting rope lifting rope to the suspension devices at the
(MRL) machine.
(to be supplied by the local Schindler
Organization)
Rope of approx. length 3000 mm, to secure
Auxiliary rope the machine against swinging during lifting
- procedure
(MRL) (to be supplied by the local Schindler
Organization)
Mechanical or electrical, with a minimum
Lifting gear
- loading capacity of 350 kg, to lift the
(MRL) machine to hoistway top
Tools and equipment required for lifting and positioning the machine
-

Caution !
Make sure that no items or cables are put on top of the machine. These can be
damaged when the machine is lifted close to the hoistway ceiling.
-

15.10.01 Page 90 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Overview Picture
Lifting Procedure

How the machine is lifted to the hoistway ceiling


1. Pulley at hoistway ceiling
2. Loop of lifting rope
3. Hook of lifting gear rope
4. Lifting gear rope
5. Top platform of scaffolding
6. Pulley at hoistway wall
7. Lifting gear
8. Fixation point on second-top floor
9. Auxiliary rope
10. Brake magnet
11. Lifting eye
12. Machine support
13. Lifting rope

15.10.01 Page 91 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fastening the No. Step


Lifting Rope
Insert the lifting rope [1] into the hole of one of the suspension devices [2]
310
previously attached to the machine and secure it with two rope clips [3].
Route the lifting rope over the pulleys at the hoistway ceiling as shown in the
311
overview picture.
Insert the rope into the hole of the suspension device at the other side of the
312
machine and secure it with two rope clips.

Fastening the lifting rope to the suspension devices


-

Installing the 313 Secure the lifting gear [7] at the fixation point [8] on the second-top floor.
Lifting Gear
Insert the hook [3] of the lifting gear rope [4] into the loop [2] of the lifting
314
rope.
Route the lifting gear rope through the pulley [6] fitted to the hoistway wall
315
and then out of the hoistway to the lifting gear [7] on the second-top floor.
-

15.10.01 Page 92 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Danger !
The lifting and positioning procedure requires particular care to avoid any
accidents or damage to the machine.
For your personal safety, operate the lifting gear only from the landing floor.
Never stay in the hoistway under the suspended machine.
Lifting the Temporarily remove part (or all) of the upmost platform [5] of the scaffolding,
Machine 316 so that there is enough free space for the machine to be lifted to the hoistway
ceiling.
Position the machine as near to the floor edge as is safe. The traction
317 sheave side must direct to the hoistway wall where the machine support [12]
is installed.
Attach the auxiliary rope [9] to the lifting eye [11] of the machine. Make sure
that both auxiliary and lifting rope [13] are clear off the brake magnets [10].
318
The auxiliary rope is used to secure the machine against uncontrolled
swinging.
By operating the lifting gear [7], smoothly lift the machine until it is clearly
319 above the upmost scaffolding platform. Secure the machine at its present
position.
320 Re-install (the removed part of) the upmost scaffolding platform.
Remove the auxiliary rope and, if necessary, the lifting eyes from the top of
321 the machine.
Lifting eyes remain on the installation or with the KG for later use
Continue carefully lifting the machine to the ceiling but not closer than 10
322
mm.
323 Make sure to secure the machine at its present position.
-

Caution !
For your personal safety, keep time of working under the suspended
machine to a minimum.
Make sure that the installation rails are firmly seated and secured against
displacement.
-

15.10.01 Page 93 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fitting the Push the slotted end [3] of each installation rail right onto the spacer tubes of
Installation Rails 324 two bolts [2] on the machine support. At both ends distance A must be 113
mm.
Secure each installation rail with a bolt and nut [4]. Make sure that the rails
325 are firmly seated and exactly horizontal. If necessary, use shims to align the
rails.
Grease the top edges [1] of the installation rails.
326
Greasing facilitates moving the machine on the installation rails.

Fitting the installation rails onto the machine support


-

15.10.01 Page 94 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Caution !
The instructions for the positioning procedure must be followed exactly as
described to ensure proper seating of the machine.
Positioning the Slacken the lifting rope and carefully and slowly lower the machine onto the
Machine 327
installation rails [1] so that the rails fit into the grooves at the machine bottom.
Push the machine towards the hoistway wall to its end position, that is when
the counter bores [4] in the machine bottom match with the points of the
screws [3] inserted through machine support and damping pads.

328 Normally, the suspension devices remain at the machine. However,


with restricted space in the hoistway the suspension device could
collide with the converter. In this case, remove the suspension devices
before the machine is near to the converter and store them in a
suitable place.

Positioning the machine


Version 01-0, final release / Last edited on July 23, 2001
K 604131 E
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 95 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Gearless Machine PMS230 INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 11/1999

Section 3-1-3 Fastening and Grounding Machine to Support


-

Tools and Tool / Material Figure Description


Material
4 hex head screws Material No. 127209
4 spacer tubes Material No. 127196
4 rubber washers Material No. 127195
Fastening 4 washers Material No. 249334
material (all included in machine supply)
(MRL)
2 wires of 250 mm length, to secure the
fastening screws against rotation
Material No. 487393 (included in
machine supply).
Length 250 mm, complete with screws
M6 and washers.
Ground wire
Material No. 127225 (Included in
machine supply)

Required for tightening the fastening


Torque wrench
screws

Material and tools required for fastening the machine to the machine support
-

15.10.01 Page 96 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Removing the No. Step


Installation Rails
Make sure that the points of the four M12x90 screws [3] are snugly lodged in
4063
the counter bores [4] in the machine bottom.
Starting with those nearer to you, screw the screws [3] in at a regular rate to
push the machine upwards.
4064
Raise the machine only ca. 5 mm by using the screws [3] to make the
installation rails [1] become free.
Remove the two screws [2] used to fasten the installation rails [1] and
4065
remove the rails.

The machine is raised and lowered by using screws


-

15.10.01 Page 97 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fastening the Carefully lower the machine onto the damping pads by unscrewing the four
Machine 4066 M12x90 screws at a regular rate, starting with those nearer to the hoistway
wall.
Fasten the machine to the support with the four hex head screws [4],
washers [3], spacer tubes [2] and rubber washers [1]. Make sure to push the
4067
spacer tubes [2] right into the counter bores [5] in the machine casing (see
Detail A).
4068 Remove the M12x90 screws.
4069 Tighten the hex head screws [4] up to 33 Nm.

Fastening the machine to the support


-

15.10.01 Page 98 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Securing the Link the two fastening screws [2] of each damping pad [1] with a safety wire
Fastening [3] to secure them against rotation (see Detail B).
Screws 4070
This method also guarantees that screws that have become loose are
detected when maintenance checks are done.

Fastening screws properly secured by safety wire (Detail B in horizontal view)

15.10.01 Page 99 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installing the Scrape any paint off the surface around the hole [2] in the machine support to
Ground Wire 337
ensure proper conduction of the grounding.
Screw one end of the ground wire to the hole [1] in the machine casing and
338
the other end to the hole [2] in the machine support.

Fixation points for the ground wire on machine and machine support
Version 01-0, final release / Last edited on July 23, 2001
K 604131 E
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 100 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
©03/2000

Chapter 3 Preparations English

Summary It is crucial to first correctly position the supporting bracket to insure adequate air
flow and space to route cables and change ropes at the hitch (suspension) plate.
The minimum distance measurements are determined by the placement of the
converter on the left or right side of the hoistway (as one enters the elevator from
the landing).

Positioning
Overview - MRL

Overview Positioning - MRL


Pos. Component Description
1 Supporting bracket
2 Screws, dowels, and washers to fix supporting bracket to wall
3 Holding screws to hang converter on supporting bracket
4 Set screw to fix supporting bracket
5 Rope hitch (suspension) plate
6 Brake magnet from machine PMS230/PMA350.
Converter Components for MRL Installation
-

15.10.01 Page 101 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Warning: Avoid Overheating!


Strictly follow the distances given below and in the dispo plan; the frequency
converter can overheat if not positioned to allow for adequate air flow at top and
sides!

Check Minimum
Distances - MRL

Minimum Distances - MRL


No. Step
Adjust the position of the supporting bracket to the minimum distances given
300
in the dispo plan and in the next steps.
* Wherever possible, use 100 mm! The distance 25 mm should be used only
301
for the smallest TK (car depths).
** Wherever possible 100 mm. The spacing 55 mm is the minimum to be
303
able to change or adjust the ropes without removing the converter.

15.10.01 Page 102 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Check Minimum
Distances - MR

MR Minimum Distances
No. Step
Adjust the position of the supporting bracket to the minimum distances given
300
in the dispo plan and in the next steps.
The distance between the inverter support and the machine protector is 108
301
+/- 60mm. This distance for installation on either side of the machine.
Version 01-0, released / Last edited on June 27, 2001
K 604162 E
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 103 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
©03/2000

Section 4-1 MRL Mechanical Installation English

Summary The following instructions apply to installation of SchindlerEurolift® without machine


room. Carry out the positioning checks as described in Chapter 3 first.
-

Drill Holes No. Step


Drill the 4 holes to fix the supporting bracket as positioned to allow for the
401
distances given in Step 300.
402 Insert dowels.

Holes for Supporting Bracket


403 Screw in supporting bracket.
-

15.10.01 Page 104 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Attach Attach the Variodyn VF22BR or VF33BR converter by inserting it onto the
Frequency premounted screws (arrow 1 in figure below) on the supporting bracket.
Converter
404 Two installers are recommended for this step! Do not set the converter
onto the bolts of the rope hitch, since this could damage the ventilator
grating on converter housing.
Once converter is set in, let it slip down on the screws of the bracket (arrow
405
2), see inset A in figure below.

Set Converter into Supporting Bracket


Finally insert (arrow 3) M5 set screw and tighten (winding is in converter
housing).
406
The converter is not fixed properly until this set screw is correctly
inserted and tightened!

Version 01-0, released / Last edited on June 27, 2001


K 604162 E
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 105 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-1-3 Buffer Stand / 1. Variation

Summary This section describes the installation instruction and an overview details of the
buffer stand - 1. Variation. This variation is used for HSS1, HSS2 = 225 to
1000 mm. It is possible to use two types of buffers OLEO and ACLA under the car
and the counterweight. The selection of which type buffers depends on the
calculation and commission. Rail HSS > 200 T75, T89 - Mat. No. 56014353.
HSS1 - Height of plinth underneath car
HSS2 - Height of plinth underneath counterweight
-

15.10.01 Page 106 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Warning After finishing the installation of car and counterweight it is possible to start
with the installation of the buffer - stands of the Pit Set. The buffers are
needful to guard from damage!
Installation of No. Step
buffer stand with
buffers Specify the position of the buffer stand on the ALU - section based on the
4029
position of the car buffer and the counterweight buffer.
Put special bolts [5] into the ALU - section [1].
4030 Install zinc - coated sheet (100x100x1) [2] into the ALU - section [1], is an
anti corrosion sheet under the tube of the buffer stand.
Install fixing sheets [3] on the ALU - section [1].
4031 Screw fixing sheets [3] by means of bolts M10 [6], washers and nuts. Do not
tight.
Put in the tube [4] between the fixing sheets [3] and tight fast bolts M10 [6].
4032
Define the right position of the buffer stand and tight special bolts [5].

The installation of buffer stand

15.10.01 Page 107 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Install corresponding number and type of buffers by means of bolts M16 on


buffer support [3].
4033
The buffer OLEO [6] is fixed by four bolts M16 [7], washers and nuts. The
buffer ACLA [4] is fixed by one bolt M16 [5] and washer.
Put the buffer support [3] with the buffer on the buffer stand (tube) [1] and
4034
provide it by two bolts M6 [2].

1. Variation of buffer stand

15.10.01 Page 108 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

1. Variation - This section describes an overview assembly of the Pit Set 1. Variation:
assembly

No. of
Pos. Title - description
pieces
1 ALU - section 1
Tube HSS1 1
2
Tube HSS2 1
3 Fixing Sheet 2
4 Buffer Support 1
Fixing Material ACLA var. 1 1
5
Fixing Material OLEO var. 1 1
Bolt ISO 4017-M10x30-8.8-A2L 4
6 Hexagon Nut ISO 4032-M10-8-A2L 4
Retaining Washer RIP NFE 25511-10,2x22-FDST-DAC 8
T - Head Bolt with Nut E = 18-M12x40-A2K 8
7
Retaining Washer RIP NFE 25511-12,4x27-FDST-DAC 8
Bolt ISO 4017-M6x25-8.8-A2L 2
8
Hexagon Nut ISO 4032-M6-8-A2L 2
Buffer OLEO SEB 16.2
by
9 Buffer ACLA 3
commission
Buffer ACLA 5
Pit Set - 1. Variation - assembly description

Mark Description
HSS1 Height of plinth underneath car
HSS2 Height of plinth underneath counterweight

K 604141 E Last edited on October 08, 2001 / version 02, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 109 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-1-4 Buffer Stand / 2. Variation

Summary This section contains the installation information and an overview details of the
buffer stand 2.Variation. This variation is used only for HSS2 = 63 mm under the
counterweight. It is possible to use only buffer type OLEO and always one piece
according to calculation. Rail for SEB T75, T89 - Mat. No. 56014344.
HSS2 - height of plinth underneath counterweight
-

Warning After finish installation of counterweight it is possible start with installation


buffer - stands of Pit Set. It is needful buffers to guard from damage!

Installation of No. Step


buffer stand with
buffer Specify the position of the buffer stand on the ALU - section based on the
4035
position of the counterweight buffer.
Put special bolts [2] into the ALU - section [1].
4036 Install the fixing plate [3] on the ALU - section [1] and screw the fixing plate
by means of special bolts [2] with washers. Do not tight.
4037 Put corresponding number of distance sheets [4] on the fixing plate [3].
Install OLEO buffer [6] on distance sheets [4].
4038
Screw the buffer by means of bolts M16 [5] and washers.
4039 Define the right position of the buffer and tight the special bolts [2].

15.10.01 Page 110 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

2. Variation of buffer stand

15.10.01 Page 111 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

2. Variation - This section describes an assembly overview of the Pit Set - 2. Variation:
assembly

No. of
Pos. Title - description
pieces
1 ALU - section 1
2 Distance Sheet 2
3 Fixing Plate 1
T - Head Bolt with Nut E = 18-M12x40-A2K 8
4
Retaining Washer RIP NFE 25511-12,4x27-FDST-DAC 8
5 Fixing Material OLEO 1
6 Buffer OLEO SEB 16.2 1
2. Variation - assembly overview

Mark Description
HSS2 Height of plinth underneath counterweight

K 604141 E Last edited on September 25, 2001 / version 02, released


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 112 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-6-1 Layout

Summary This section describes information of the Counterweight layout. The Counterweight
is supplied in decomposed condition. The Counterweight consist of preinstalled
pulley suspension and other additional components. The Counterweight has mark
e.g. CWS 40 (CW = counterweight, S = steel ropes, mark 40 = BG 400).
The Counterweight assembly - Mat. No. 56014127. An assembly drawing for
Counterweight is document Z 43920069.
-

Overview - This section describes the basic parameters and technical data of the
technical data Counterweight CWS:

Parameters CWS 40 CWS 45 CWS 50 CWS 55 CWS 60


BG [mm] 400 450 500 550 600
BGS [mm] 430 480 530 580 630
DR [mm] 400
DZ [mm] 10
ZZ [mm] 3÷7 3÷7 3÷7 3÷7 3÷7
Number of buffers 1 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2
Compensating chain Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N
HGR [mm] 2250
HGGF [mm] 1890
GQ [kg] ≤ 1000
1
VKN [m/s]
1,6
The Counterweight - technical data

Mark Description
DR Pitch diameter of pulley
DZ Diameter of suspension ropes
ZZ Number of suspension ropes
BG Width of counterweight
BKS Distance between guide rails of car
BGS Distance between guide rails of counterweight
HGGF Height of counterweight filler material
Height of counterweight from bottom yoke lower edge to
HGR
crosshead upper edge
GQ Rated load
VKN Rated speed of car
Marks overview
-

15.10.01 Page 113 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Position of This section describes the position of the Counterweight to the wall:
counterweight

Pos./Mark Description
BGS Distance between guide rails of counterweight
SG Distance between wall and middle of counterweight guide rail
1 Compensating Chain Fixing cpl.
2 Counterweight CWS
3 Counterweight guide rail C
4 Car guide rail A
The position of the Counterweight
-

15.10.01 Page 114 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Counterweight - This section describes assembly overview of Counterweight CWS:


assembly

Counterweight CWS assembly


-

15.10.01 Page 115 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Description - No. of
counterweight Pos. Title - description
pieces
assembly
Pulley Suspension ZZR5 1
1
Pulley Suspension ZZR7 1
2 Uprights welded right 1
3 Uprights welded left 1
4 Upper Yoke welded 1
5 Bottom Yoke welded 1
Guide Shoe L14 BFK 10
6 4
Guide Shoe L14 BFK 16
7 Emergency Guiding 4
8 Buffer Stop cpl. 1/2
by
9 Filler
commission
10 Anti Jump Safety 2
11 Compensating chain fixing cpl. 1
Counterweight assembly description

K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 116 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-6-2 Pulley Suspension

Summary This section contains installation information and an overview of details for the
Pulley Suspension. We use two types of pulley - DR 400, ZZR 5 and ZZR 7. The
Pulley Suspension is supplied in preinstalled condition.
-

Position of This section describes the position of the pulleys to the Counterweight:
pulleys BG - Width of counterweight

The position of pulleys


-

15.10.01 Page 117 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of No. Step


Pulley
Suspension on 4111 Start installation of the Pulley Suspension in the pit of the hoistway.
upper yoke Put the Pulley Suspension [1] with distance washers [4] on the upper yoke
4112
[2].
Screw off six distance tubes with bolts M12x160, washers and nuts [3] and
4113
distance washers [4].

The installation of pulley on upper yoke

Level the right position of the Pulley Suspension by the right number of
4114
distance washers (see picture).

15.10.01 Page 118 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The levelling of Pulley Suspension on upper yoke

No. of
Pos. Title - description
pieces
1 Upper Yoke 1
2 Distance Washer 2
3 Distance Washer 5
4 Distance Washer 7
5 Distance Tube and Fixing Material 6
6 Distance Tube and Fixing Material 6
7 Wall -

Pull up the Pulley Suspension with the upper yoke by lifting gear in the
4115
pit.

Warning The pulley axis is identical with the axis of the counterweight guide rails.
The counterweight frame has an offset in face of the pulley axis on
dimensions 4 mm in direction to the wall.
K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 119 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-6-3 Counterweight

Summary This section describes the procedure of installing the frame with basic data of
additional details. The counterweight frame consist of preinstalled upper and
preinstalled bottom yoke and uprights.
-

Bottom Yoke - No. Step


installation of
buffer stop cpl. 4116 Fix the buffer plate [2] to the bottom yoke [1] by means of bolts M12x50 [4].

The fixing of buffer plate

Fix the rope compensation [3] to the buffer plate [2] by means of bolt
4117
M12x50 and washer [5].

15.10.01 Page 120 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The fixing of rope compensation


-

15.10.01 Page 121 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of Take both uprights welded [1, 2] and place them to the upper yoke with the
counterweight 4118 Pulley Suspension [3] and the bottom yoke [4] in the right position. The
frame Pulley Suspension with the upper yoke has to be hung.
Install uprights welded [1, 2] so, you have access to the bolts of the guide
4119
shoes (it is 27,5 mm from upper edge of yokes).
Screw uprights to yokes by means of four bolts M12x35 [5] edgewise of the
4120
yoke. Use torque wrench for fixing.
Put the complete counterweight frame between the guide rails, so these
4121
bolts of the guide shoes should be available from the pit.

The installation of Counterweight frame


-

15.10.01 Page 122 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of No. Step


guide shoes
Shore up the counterweight frame by wooden chock and unloose
suspension of lifting gear (it is possible move of counterweight between
4122
guide rails for levelling of guide shoes). The suspension of the counterweight
is not delivered.

The position of counterweight between guide rails

15.10.01 Page 123 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Check that the distance from the tip of the guide rail blade to the guide shoe
4123
lining is the same for all guide shoes.
4124 Position the guide shoes on the left and right sides of the upper yoke.
4125 Position the guide shoes on the left and right sides of the bottom yoke.
4126 Align shoes parallel to the guide rail direction (no skew!)

The alignment shoe parallel to guide rail

4127 Start to install the guide shoes [4] on the upper yoke [1].
Put the emergency guiding [2] with the guide shoe [4] on the upper yoke [1]
4128
and screw bolts M12x50 with washers [5].
Put in the fixing plate [3] into the upper yoke [1] and fix this fixing plate on
4129
bolts [5]. Do not tight fast bolts.

15.10.01 Page 124 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The installation guide shoe on upper yoke

Install the guide shoes on the bottom yoke.


Put the emergency guiding with the guide shoe on the bottom yoke and
4130
screw bolts M12x50 with washers. Put in the fixing plate into the bottom
yoke and fix this fixing plate on bolts. Do not tight fast bolts.
In case of using a compensating chain the installation way is as
4131
follows:
Screw the compensating chain fixing [5] by means of bolt M10x50, washers
4132
and two nuts [6].
Put the emergency guiding [4] with the compensating chain fixing [5] on the
4133
bottom yoke [1].
4134 Put in the fixing plate [2] to the bottom yoke [1].
Put the guide shoe [3] on the compensating chain fixing [5] and screw it by
4135
means of two bolts M12x50 and washers [6]. Fast tight bolts.

15.10.01 Page 125 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The installation of compensating chain on bottom yoke

4136 Check the gap of 1 mm between the guide shoes and the rails on both sides.
If maximum clearance of 1 mm is exceeded, go to the opposite guide
4137
shoe and fine adjust.
4138 When distance is within 1 mm, tight fast all bolts of the guide shoes.

The check adherence


Note Use wooden chock for change of the guide shoes, which provides
contradiction of the counterweight and the guide rail during this change.

Note After installation of the counterweight it is needful to clean and lubricate the
counterweight guide rails.
-

15.10.01 Page 126 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Dimensions of This section describes the basic data of the steel and the lead filler:
filler
BG [mm] 400 450 500 550 600
Dimensions 385x100x30 435x100x30 485x100x30 535x100x30 585x100x30
Mat. No. 56014270 56014271 56014272 56014273 56014274
GGK [kg]
9,07 10,24 11,42 12,60 13,78
(for 1 piece)
Steel filler description

BG [mm] 400 450 500 550 600


Dimensions 385x100x30 435x100x30 485x100x30 535x100x30 585x100x30
Mat. No. 56014281 56014282 56014283 56014284 56014285
GGK [kg]
13,10 14,80 16,50 18,20 19,90
(for 1 piece)
Lead filler description
-

Installation of 4139 Fill counterweight by filler in 1/2 required weight.


filler to
counterweight

The filler of counterweight

Pull up the counterweight to the headroom and fix it on the beam of the
4140
Counterweight Suspension Point (follows installation of car).
4141 Install traction rope by section 4-9.

15.10.01 Page 127 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The safety of filling material

Warning In case of using lead filler it is necessary to use protecting gloves.


After finishing the work, give back out numbered lead fillers to the Schindler
company. The company Schindler ecological dispose lead filler.
K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 128 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5 Installation

5.1 Install console

3x
Hex Screw M12x30, Washer A13, Nut M12

Id.No. 962042

80

8
Rail installation (C40) or Anchorbolt--Installation

7
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

for AP
2 x HEX SCREW M8x40 Id.No. 290056
4 x HEX SERRATED M8 Id.No. 997575
619892
3x
M12x30 (C40), Washer A13, Nut M12 290216
or
290025
M12x120, Washer A13, Nut M12
to third parties.

Anchor bolt installation 619896


( or for AP Version, M16 Anchorbolts provided by customer )

Picture shows standard version


for AP version similar procedure

Fig. 5

INVENTIO AG Page 7 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 129 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.2 Align console

1000

TKF+120
92

1035
TKF+28
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

On each floor!
to third parties.

Picture shows standard version


for AP version similar procedure

Fig. 6

INVENTIO AG Page 8 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 130 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.3 Engage door frame with console

2 5

6
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

8
to third parties.

Picture shows standard version


for AP version similar procedure

Fig. 7

INVENTIO AG Page 9 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 131 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.4 Engage transom with doorframe and bolt it

13

M6x12
962460
4
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

CHC M10x20
962462 14
to third parties.

Picture shows standard version


for AP version similar procedure

Fig. 8

INVENTIO AG Page 10 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 132 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.5 Align door frame in all two axis


5.6 Set fixation angle to building in place

Standard Version
AP Version
Upper fixing
59302010
619896
290025

290216

964324

619892

9
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Alignment tolerance !1 mm

427514
to third parties.

Picture shows standard version


for AP version similar procedure

Fig. 9

INVENTIO AG Page 11 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 133 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.7 Install sill & toe guard

10, 11
997827
M6x12

997574
Nut M6
14

997144
T--Head M8x20

997575
Nut M8 20

997827
M6x12
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Nut M6
997574

Fig. 10
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 12 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 134 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.8 Set door panel in place

*
*
524695 484947
Nut M10 Washer 10.2
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

* BT≥1000 →3rd bolt

Fig. 11
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 13 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 135 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.9 Adjust door panel & transmission

Standard Version

A
Alignment tool

13

17

Detail A

290047
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Hex M8x10

484948
Washer 8.2
to third parties.

962141

Excenter
962142

Fig. 12

INVENTIO AG Page 14 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 136 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.10 Engage transmission

SW 10

M6x12
997827

Detail B
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

to third parties.

Fig. 14

INVENTIO AG Page 16 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 137 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.11 Adjust hoistway interlock

First contact !
Standard Version

Door closed completely !

Fig. 15

! AP Version
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

to third parties.

Fig. 16

Locklever engaged 7mm => First contact (contact closed)

INVENTIO AG Page 17 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 138 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.12 Engage door unlocking device and check its function

Check Fixation Unlocking Device

Activation Pin

M6x50

A
Unlocking Device
Plate

SW 10
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Overlap min. 3 mm

Picture shows standard version


for AP version similar procedure
B
to third parties.

Unlocking
Key
Id.No. 425007

Fig. 17

The function of the unlocking device (A) have to be controlled with the key (B).

INVENTIO AG Page 18 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 139 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.13 Install counter weight guide

Standard Version AP Version

Nut Screw
M8x16 M8x16
290024 290054
Washer M6 M6x16 Washer 10.2
290020 524389 484948
Cage Nut M6
654507
Washer 10.2
484948
Nut Screw
M8x16 M8x16
290024 290054
18
18
M8x10

A
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

17
17
M8x10
290047

Engage plate with guide rail


and bend the strap (A)
to third parties.

Fig. 18

INVENTIO AG Page 19 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 140 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.14 Bring the closing weight in position

Pan tap 4.2x9.5


3x 524568

19
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

5.15 Check closing through counter weight

Detail B B
to third parties.

A
Picture shows standard version
for AP version similar procedure

Fig. 19

INVENTIO AG Page 20 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 141 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.16 Preassembly door frame (without transom)

5.16.1 100×
×100 Box Frame

Laps

1. Engage jamb
in the transom

3. Bend strap

2
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

2. Bring angle
bent strap into the jamb
to third parties.

Fig. 20

INVENTIO AG Page 21 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 142 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

2 3

Fig. 21

Naps have to be engaged completely (Naps down !)


any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 22 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 143 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

5 Installation

1. Install console

3x
Hex Screw M12x30, Washer A13, Nut M12

80

Rail installation (C40) or Anchorbolt–Installation

619892
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

290216
3x
M12x30 (C40), Washer A13, Nut M12
290025
or
M12x120, Washer A13, Nut M12 619896
Anchor bolt installation
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 5 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 144 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

2. Align console

1000

TKF +145
(117)

1035
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

On each floor!
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 6 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 145 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

3. Engage door frame with console

6
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

8 7
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 7 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 146 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

4. Engage transom with doorframe and bolt it

13

14

M6x12

962460
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

M10x20

997363
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 8 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 147 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

5. Align door frame in all two axis


6. Set fixation angle to building in place

619896
Y 290216
290025

619892

15

Allignment tolerance "1mm


any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

427514
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 9 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 148 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

7. Install sill and toe guard

10

17
T–Head M8x20
997144 997827
Nut M8 M6x12
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

997575
997574
Nut M6
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 10 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 149 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

8. Set door panel in place

Washer 10.5
484947

Nut M10
524695
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

BT w 1000 ³ 3rd bolt

12
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 11 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 150 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

9. Adjust door panel & transmission

Alignment tool
5 (max 6)

Excenter

13
Y

17

Guide shoe
Alignement
A
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated

Detail A
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

290047
Hex M8x10

484948
Washer 8.2

Y
to third parties.

962141
Excenter
962142

INVENTIO AG Page 12 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 151 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

Y 10. Engage transmission

Alignment tool

SW 10

M6x12
997827
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Detail A
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 13 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 152 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

11. Adjust hoistway interlock

Y First contact !

Á
Á
Á

Door closed completely !


any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Locklever engaged 7mm ³ First contact (contact closed)


to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 14 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 153 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

12. Engage door unlocking device and check its function

13

Activation Pin
Y M6x50
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

A
10

Overlap min. 3

B
The unlocking
to third parties.

device must
Unlocking overlap to the
Y Key bended sheet
Id.No. 425007

Check the door unlocking device (A) using a unlocking key (B).

INVENTIO AG Page 15 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 154 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

13. Bring the closing weight in position

B
Detail B

Y
A

A Pan tap 4.2x9.5


3x 524568

16
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

to third parties.

14. Check closing through counter weight

INVENTIO AG Page 16 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 155 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

15. Preassembly door frame (without transom)

Laps
Y

1. Engage jamb
in the transom

3. Bend strap

3
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

2. Bring angle
bent strap into the jamb
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 17 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 156 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

Y Step 2
2
Y Step 1

6
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Naps have to be engaged completely (Naps down!)


to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 18 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 157 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Varidor 30 INVENTIO AG
INSTALLATION Control Box
© 11/2000

Section 4-1 Overview

Summary

Mechanical Installation Overview

15.10.01 Page 158 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Number Description Material Number


1 Upper wall part (option) 966245
2 Wall fixation angle 964990
Hex head screw - M6x16-88-
3 290076
ZN7
4 Washer L6N 290280
5 Box 966330
6 Insulation press (door frame) 966383
7 Insulated plate 966471
8 Lateral front 964989
9 Equipped door 966339
Hex rip flange bolt - M6x12-8.8-
10 997827
ZN7
See Miconic MX-GC Installation
11 Control modules
document K 604104 for details.

K 604042 E Version 01, released / Last edited on October 01, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 159 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Varidor 30 INVENTIO AG
INSTALLATION Control Box
© 11/2000

Section 4-2 Assembly and Fixation

Assembly No. Step


401 Assemble the control box.

Assembly
1. Lateral front
2. Upper wall part (option)

15.10.01 Page 160 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Alignment 402 Carefully align the control box.

Alignment

1. Finished floor
2. Sub-floor
3. Alignment
4. Landing door

15.10.01 Page 161 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Bottom Fixation 403 Fix the control box to the sub-floor and landing door assembly.

Bottom and Side Fixation

1. Finished floor
2. Sub-floor

15.10.01 Page 162 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Top Fixation 404 Fix control box at top.

Top Fixation

1. Upper wall part (option)


2. Brake release cable

15.10.01 Page 163 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Release Lever 405 Route and fix brake release lever and cable.

Release Lever
K 604042 E Version 01, released / Last edited on October 09, 2001
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 164 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Varidor 30 INVENTIO AG
INSTALLATION Control Box
© 11/2000

Section 4-3 Insulation Panels

Insulation No. Step


Support
406 Install the insulation support components.

Insulation Support
Number Description Material Number
Wall fixation 966411
1
Box 966330
2 Lateral front 964989
3 Rivet DIN7337A 3.2x6-NICU 555297
4 Insulation support 966382
Insulation Support Material Numbers

15.10.01 Page 165 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Insulation Panels 407 Install the 30mm insulation panel (1).

Insulating Panel - F90/EI/REI/A60


408 Install the two 15 mm insulating panels.
409 Install the 6 mm insulating panel (same for F90 and EI/REI/A60).

15.10.01 Page 166 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Detail - Insulating Panel - F90


Number Description Material Number
Insulating panel - DOMISOL
1 966429
303 15 mm x 272 mm
Insulating panel - DOMISOL
2 966432
303 15 mm
Insulating panel - SUPALUX
3 966431
S 6 mm
Insulation panel - BX 643
4 966430
30 mm
Insulating Panel - F90 Material Numbers

410 Install the insulation press.

15.10.01 Page 167 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Insulating Panel - F90/EI/REI/A60


Number Description Material Number
Insulating panel - BX 643
1 966430
30 mm
Insulating panel - DOMISOL
2 966432
303 15 mm
Insulating panel - SUPALUX
3 966431
S 6 mm
4 Insulation press (door frame) 966383
Insulating Panel - F90/EI/REI/A60 Material Numbers
411 Install the insulation holder.

15.10.01 Page 168 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Detail - Insulating Panel - F90


Number Description Material Number
1 Box 966330
Insulating panel - DOMISOL
2 966429
303 15 mm
Insulating panel - SUPALUX
3 966431
S 6 mm
4 Insulation holder 966380
Detail - Insulating Panel - F90 Material Numbers

15.10.01 Page 169 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

EI/REI/A60 Version
Number Description Material Number
Insulating panel - BX 643
1 966430
30 mm
Insulating panel - Wacker
2 966470
WDS 950 15 mm
Insulating panel - DOMISOL
3 966432
303 15 mm
Insulating panel - SUPALUX
4 966431
S 6 mm
EI/REI/A60 Version Material Numbers

15.10.01 Page 170 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Detail - EI/REI/A60 Version


Number Description Material Number
1 Box 966330
Insulating panel - Wacker
2 966470
WDS 950 15 mm
Insulating panel - SUPALUX
3 966431
S 6 mm
4 Insulation holder 966380
Detail - EI/REI/A60 Version Material Numbers

K 604042 E Version 01, released / Last edited on October 09, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 171 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 3-1 Lower Yoke


-

Safety Gear a. The safety gear (pos.1) must be centred on its support (pos.2) and fixed with
GK1-W srews (pos.3) !
b. This set could be centred and fixed on the lower yoke.

Safety gear GK1-W


-

Stop Fork

Stop fork installation

15.10.01 Page 172 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Safety Gear a. The support (pos.2) must be centred on lower yoke axis (pos.a1),
G01-C b. Brake lining (pos.4) must be centred on safety gear body (pos.3), axis a3 on
axis a2. For this operation, screw (pos.5) should be actionned.
c. Install safety gear on support (pos.2), axis a2 must be aligned on axis a1.

Safety gear G01-C


-

15.10.01 Page 173 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Pull Rod for The set centred and fixed on the lower yoke, pull rods could be screwed.
GK1-W
(pos.1 used to adjust gap between guide rail and brake lining. This operation must
be made in the last step, see para Safety Gear Adjustment).

Axis a1 must be aligned on axis a2


Pull Rod installation for GK1-W
-

15.10.01 Page 174 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Pull Rod for The set centred and fixed on the lower yoke, pull rods could be screwed and
G01-C adjusted.

a. Position the threading wedge (pos.5) to obtain the distance of 35mm between
pos.4 and pos.5 (see detail X).
b. Adjust gap to 0.5mm between pos.2 and pos.3 (see detail Y). This gap could be
adjusted with the pos.1.

Detail X

Pull Rod installation for GO1-C

Detail Y

Axis a1 must be aligned on axis a2

15.10.01 Page 175 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Detail Z
-

Lower Yoke
Installation

Place the lower yoke on the buffer (buffer OLEO or ACLA should not be
installed)

Lower yoke installation (version shown : TL doors)


-

15.10.01 Page 176 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Guide Shoes
Installation

Guide shoes axis must be aligned with safety gear axis


Guide shoes premounted on support (version shown : with safety gear GK1-W)
-

15.10.01 Page 177 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Positioning

1. Wood wedges or Needles

Lower yoke positioning


-

15.10.01 Page 178 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Safety Gear Adjust pull rod and safety gears (see para "pull rod for GK1-W" or para "pull rod for
and Pull Rod G01-C")
Adjustment

GK1-W adjustment

a. Setting screw

G01-C adjudtment
-

Guide Shoes
Adjustment

Guide shoes adjustment


K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 179 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 3-2 Governor Lever

Summary Two methods are describe in this chapter :


1. for GQ<=630kg : without upright
2. for GQ>630kg : with upright
-

Limite stop for


GQ<=630kg

Limit stop fixation for GQ<=630kg


-

15.10.01 Page 180 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Limite stop for


GQ>630kg and
Upright
Installation

Limit stop and uprights fixation for GQ>630kg


-

15.10.01 Page 181 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Governor
Lever Installation

1=Dowel pin 6x60


2=Dowel pin 3.5x40

a : Install the governor lever


b : Put in the dowel pin 6x40
c : Put in the dowel pin 3.5x40
d : Just for GK1-W : place the screw for governor abutment. For G01-C, without
this screw.

Governor lever installation (version shown : TL doors)


K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 182 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 3-3-1 Underslung Old Design GQ≤1000kg


-

Support
Positioning

15.10.01 Page 183 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Support positioning
-

15.10.01 Page 184 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Underslung
Installation

a : Get greasy on indicated surfaces to facilitate the location in the following


installation steps,
b : Screw the underslung on lower yoke by hand.

Place the underslung on the lower yoke (version shown : TL doors)


-

15.10.01 Page 185 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Underslung Do not tighten the screws


Positionment

Underslung positionment (version shown : 630Kg)


K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 186 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 3-3-2 Underslung New Design GQ≤1000kg


-

Support GQ
Positioning Positionment overview (dimensions in mm)
(mm)

≤630

>630

Support positioning
-

15.10.01 Page 187 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Underslung
Installation

a : Get greasy on indicated surfaces to facilitate the location in the following


installation steps,
b : Screw the underslung on lower yoke by hand.

Place the underslung on the lower yoke (version shown : TL doors)


-

15.10.01 Page 188 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Underslung Do not tighten the screws


Positionment

Underslung positionment (version shown : 630Kg)


K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 189 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 3-4 Lower Yoke Interfaces


-

Configuration Chain support, buffer plates and compensation weight must be installed
Overview before platform.

GQ
Overview Description
(kg)

1. Chain support
≤ 2. Buffer plate
630 a. Compensating chain
position

VKN = 1m/s

1. Chain support
2. Buffer plate
3. Compensation weight
support
>630
VKN = 1,6m/s 4. Compensation weight
b. Suitable position for
compensating chain
c. If pos. (a) not possible

Configuration overview
-

15.10.01 Page 190 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Assembly

Assembly

K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 191 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 3-5 Platform

Summary This section explains how to install the platform and how to fix the underslung.
-

l Screws to fix underslung on lower yoke (see section 3-3-1, section 3-3-2 or
section 3-3-3 paragraph Underslung Positionnement) must be tightened after
the fixation from platform on lower yoke (paragraph Underslung Positionung and
Fastening), see bellow.
l Before setting up the frame on the lower yoke the additional weights should be
set up, see section 3-4 (Lower yoke interfaces).
-

Platform
Installation

Platform installation
-

15.10.01 Page 192 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Platform Adjust TK1 (see section 3-2: Car Layout ) and fix the platform on lower yoke only
Adjustment and
Fixation

ZKE TK1
1 (0.5xTK)-110
2 0.5xTK
Platform adjustment and fixation (version shown GQ=320Kg)
-

Underslung Push the unsderslung and thighten screws


Positioning and
Fixation

Underslung fixation (Version shown : 630Kg)


-

15.10.01 Page 193 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Needles

1. Needles (100kg mini per needle)


Needles
K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 194 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Chapter 4 Walls

Summary This chapter explains how to install the walls panels.


On all panels the position on BKWxxx is engraved in accordance with followed
picture.

Traction ropes and travelling clables brackets must be installed.

Principle
Reminder

1. Panel position engraved


2. Platform
3. Panel
4. Floor covering (Installed after, see chapter 6 : Installation of Floor Covering)

Principle reminder
-

15.10.01 Page 195 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Screws Put screws on platform and keep a gap (4mm mini) between platform and washers.
Preparation

A. M6 screws position
B. Platform

Screws preparation an panels position


-

15.10.01 Page 196 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Abutments
Positionement

1. Platform
2. Screw for wall abutment
3. Screw position for wall abutment If HKZ < 15mm (rubber flooring)
4. Screw position for wall abutment If HKZ=15mm (Wood flooring)
5. Screw position for wall abutment If HKZ=30mm (Resimix flooring)
6. Screw position for wall abutment If HKZ=40mm (KOM flooring)
7. Screw position for wall abutment If HKZ=50mm (KOM flooring)

Abutments positionement
-

15.10.01 Page 197 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

First Panels
Installation

First panels installation


-

15.10.01 Page 198 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Rest Panels
Installation

Rest of panels installation


-

15.10.01 Page 199 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Spacer for COP

Spacer for COP installation


K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 200 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Chapter 5 Upper Parts


-

Car Roof
Frame
Configuration

For P23K car with one entrance this part must be turned and that if
necessary, see picture above.

Car roof frame configuration

15.10.01 Page 201 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Remove
Maintenance
Platform

Detail A Detail B
Remove screw

Remove pin

Remove maintenance platform


-

15.10.01 Page 202 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Car Roof Frame Measure L1 must be equal to measure L2±1mm

Car Roof Frame Installation (TL doors - GQ < 630 kg)


-

This label must be pasted on Counterweight Side.

Guide Shoes
GQ ≤ 630 GQ >630
Assembly

Guide shoes assembly


-

15.10.01 Page 203 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Guide Shoes
Adjustment

ZKE TK1

1 (0.5xTK)-110

2 (0.5xTK)

Upper guide shoes adjustment


-

15.10.01 Page 204 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Spring Supports

Spring supports installation


-

Maintenance Fix maintenance platform on car roof frame.


Platform
Installation

Maintenance platform installation (version shown : GQ=630kg)


-

15.10.01 Page 205 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Springs

Detail A Detail B

Springs installation
-

Interfaces All interfaces (KNE curve, OKR, AGSI, traveling cable bracket, ...) must be installed.
Installation

K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 206 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Chapter 6-1 Rubber


-

Any debris on the subfloor must be completely removed. A thorough vacuum


cleaning or sweeping is absolutely essential.

Installation

Rubber installation
K 604167 E Last edited on June 05, 2001 / version 03, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 207 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Chapter 6-2 Resimix


-

Any debris on the subfloor must be completely removed. A thorough vacuum


cleaning or sweeping is absolutely essential.

Installation

Resimix installation
K 604167 E Last edited on June 05, 2001 / version 03, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 208 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Chapter 6-3 StoneIt


-

Any debris on the subfloor must be completely removed. A thorough vacuum


cleaning or sweeping is absolutely essential.

Polyethylene Foil The polyethylene foil, thickness 0,2mm must always be laid on platform.

Polyethylene foil (thickness=0,2mm)


-

Underlay The underlay material, thickness 2,2mm should be provided over the polyethylene
Material foil.

Underlay material (thickness=2,2mm)


-

15.10.01 Page 209 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation

Silicone joint
K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 210 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Chapter 6-4 Preriquisites for Wood Flooring


-

Frontwall must be installed before this operation, see chapter 7.

Conditioning the The unopened packages should be acclimatized by being stored flat, in a dry
Planks ventilated room (about 18°C) for at least two days before starting the installation.

Conditioning the planks


-

Installation l Room air temperature : >18°C


Climate l Floor temperature : > 15°C
Conditions l Relative air humidity : <75%
-

Cleanliness of Any debris on the subfloor must be completely removed. A thorough vacuum
the Support cleaning or sweeping is absolutely essential. Even the smallest grains of sand can
lead to disagreeable sounds.
-

15.10.01 Page 211 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Polyethylene Foil The polyethylene foil, thickness 0,2mm must always be laid on platform.

Polyethylene foil (thickness=0,2mm)


-

Underlay The underlay material, thickness 2,2mm should be provided over the polyethylene
Material foil.

Underlay material (thickness=2,2mm)


K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 212 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Chapter 6-5 Wood Flooring


-

The wood flooring changes in size slightly with the change in the relative humidity
climate.
The wood flooring must not be fixed or blocked at any point.

Planning of expansion joints


-

Correct Gluing The Pergo glue has to be used for the full Pergo Guarantee to be valid.

The string of glue that appaers in the joint when the panel are pressed together is
the receipt of a correctly glued joint.

15.10.01 Page 213 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Correct gluing

1. Wedges, thickness=2mm
Follow steps a, b, c, d, e, f, g, ... See configurations bellow

15.10.01 Page 214 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Configuration
Limit of
n = even n = uneven
Application :

n n = int(TK/197) -1

BK <= 1200mm

1200 < BK <=


1800

A = (BK/3)-2 A = (BK/3)-2
B = (2xBK/3)-2 B = (2xBK/3)-2
C = TK-4-(nx197)/2 C = TK-4-(nx197)/2

BK > 1800

A = ((BK-1200)/2)-2 A = ((BK-1200)/2)-2
B = 1200 B = 1200
C = TK-4-(nx197)/2 C = TK-4-(nx197)/2

Detail

1. Wood planks
2. Underlay material (2,2mm thick)
3. Polyethylene foil (0,2mm thick)

Format Wood plank = 1200 x 197mm

Wood flooring configuration


-

15.10.01 Page 215 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Cleaning Removal of glue must be carried out immediately during installation by means of the
glue scraper and wiping with a clamp cloth.

Cleaning
-

Waiting Time
befor Passing

Waiting time befor passing = 12 hours


K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 216 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 7-1 Sill with Toe Guard

Summary This section explains how to install aluminium or stainless steel sill and toe guard
-

Sill Support

sill support installation


-

15.10.01 Page 217 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Sill Installation

sill installation
-

15.10.01 Page 218 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixture principle

1. Aluminium sill fixation


2. Stainless steel sill fixation
Fixture principle
-

15.10.01 Page 219 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Sill position

Aluminium sill position


-

15.10.01 Page 220 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Toe Guard

Toe guard installation


K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 221 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 7-2 Front Wall

Summary This section explains how to install the front wall on car.
-

Jambs
Installation

Jambs installation

15.10.01 Page 222 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Jambs Fixation
in Roof Frame

Jambs fixation in roof frame

15.10.01 Page 223 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Header
Installation

Header installation

15.10.01 Page 224 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Front wall
Fixation with
clips

Front wall fixation with clips


-

15.10.01 Page 225 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Front wall
Fixation with
screws

Front wall fixation with screws


K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 226 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Chapter 8 Switch for Car Roof Frame

Switch
Installation

Contact for car roof frame

The functioning of the switch should be tested.


Maintenance platform locked : state 1
Maintenance platform semi-opened : state 0
K 604167 E Last edited on September 11, 2001 / version 03, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 227 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Car Door K 603348 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.5/2

3 Installation

1. Check car front dimensions


2. Install door drive

Nut M10
997576
Y + Washer

Hex Screw M6
997827
Y + Washer
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 3 / 14
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 228 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Car Door K 603348 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.5/2

3. Install door panel

Y Washer M10

484947

Nut M10

524695

BT w1000 ³3rd bolt


Y
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 4 / 14
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 229 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Car Door K 603348 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.5/2

Y 4. Adjust door panel

5
Alignment tool

Guide shoe
Alignement

SW 13

SW 17

Detail A
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

290047
Hex M8x10

484948
Washer 8.2
to third parties.

962141
Excenter
962142

INVENTIO AG Page 5 / 14
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 230 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Car Door K 603348 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.5/2

5. Set clutch device in position

M10x20

524401
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Washer 10.5
Car door = 2100 Car door = 2100
484947
Hoistway door = 2100 Hoistway door = 2000
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 6 / 14
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 231 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Car Door K 603348 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.5/2

6. Engage transmission

Y Hex Screw M6x12


any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 7 / 14
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 232 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Car Door K 603348 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.5/2

Y 7. Adjust lock device

Clutch open Clutch closed


0.5

Cam
>0

( 75 ) 53
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Door open Door closed


completely !
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 8 / 14
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 233 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Car Door K 603348 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.5/2

Y 8. Adjust lock rollers

The open clutch d’ont


have to jam between the
rollers and have not more
then 1mm air.

Alignment tool
Id.No. 962658
Car

control measure 79 A
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

min. 7

(70)

Door Lock Rollers


A
to third parties.

8.5 53 8.5
closed
75 max. open bow

INVENTIO AG Page 9 / 14
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 234 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Car Door K 603358 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.5/2

3 Installation

1. Check car front dimension


2. Install door drive

P9K--DS
P9K--DN

Nut M10 Hex Screw M6x12


997576 997827
+ Washer M6 + Washer M6
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Installation for not Schindler Car


=> see attachment
to third parties.

Fig. 3

Picture shows standard version


for AP version similar procedure.

INVENTIO AG
CH--6052 Hergiswil Page 3 / 13
15.10.01 Page 235 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Car Door K 603358 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.5/2

2. Install door panel

*
*
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Washer M10

* BT ≥1000 →3rd bolt


484947
Nut M10
524695

Fig. 4
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG
CH--6052 Hergiswil Page 4 / 13
15.10.01 Page 236 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Car Door K 603358 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.5/2

3. Align door panels

Standard Version

Alignment tool
A

Guide shoe
Alignement

SW 13
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

SW 17

Detail A
290047
Hex M8x10
to third parties.

484948
Washer 8.2

962141
Excenter
962142
Fig. 5

INVENTIO AG
CH--6052 Hergiswil Page 5 / 13
15.10.01 Page 237 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Car Door K 603358 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.5/2

4. Set clutch device in position

Car door = 2100


Landing door = 2100

M 10 x 20
Id.No 524401

Washer 10.5
Id.No 484947

Car door = 2100


Landing door = 2000
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

to third parties.

Fig. 7

INVENTIO AG
CH--6052 Hergiswil Page 7 / 13
15.10.01 Page 238 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Car Door K 603358 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.5/2

5. Check Adjustement of Door locking device

Clutch open Clutch closed


0.5

Cam
>0
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

( 75 ) 53
Door open Door closed
completely !

Fig. 8
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG
CH--6052 Hergiswil Page 8 / 13
15.10.01 Page 239 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Car Door K 603358 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.5/2

6. Check Adjustment Door Lock Rollers

Alignment tool
Id.No. 962658

control measure 79

Car A
min. 7
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

(70)

Door Lock Rollers 53


8.5 8.5
75
to third parties.

closed
max. opened bow

Fig. 9

7. Install Progard
8. Set door drive into operation TK 603 349

INVENTIO AG
CH--6052 Hergiswil Page 9 / 13
15.10.01 Page 240 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-7 Installation of Ropes

Summary This section contains installation information of traction ropes and the rope for the
overspeed governor. These ropes are used for Counterweight Suspension
Point and Car Suspension Point of the elevator SchindlerEuroLift® system. The
end rope connections with or without spring for diameter rope 10 mm (Z 459116)
are used for installation of ropes by document K 602488
Traction rope - Mat. No. 462158.
Rope for overspeed governor - Mat. No. 402024.
-

Preparation of Possible damages unreeling the rope


ropes No. Step
The basic rules of rope installation must be observed (see picture). Pulling
the rope sideways off the reel or off the coil will cause the rope to open up or
tighten. This twisting alters the structure of the rope and cannot be taken
4142 back later. The forced twist lead to different lengths in the strands of steel
core ropes. Consequently, the load is distributed unevenly through the rope.
Strands which have become too long protrude from the rope a short time
after going into service.

The unreeling the rope

A kink results due to incorrect unreeling of the rope during installation, or


due to a certain amount of spin left over from the manufacturing process or
4143 lack of due care and attention, when mounting the ropes. If the rope has
taken on the form (see picture), the rope should only be returned to its
original shape by twisting it at one of its ends.

15.10.01 Page 241 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The kink on rope

Trying to cure the rope by twisting the kink itself or by loading the rope will
4144 inevitably result in the damage (see picture). The rope is then permanently
destroyed and has to be replaced.

The damage of rope


-

15.10.01 Page 242 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of Start installation of ropes on the installing platform in the upper level of the
ropes 4145
hoistway - 1 m under machine.
Remove the rope retaining guard from the machine with an opened wrench.
4146
Interlace ropes onto traction sheave.
Interlace ropes into the pulley of counterweight. After interlace of the ropes
4147
into the Pulley Suspension install three threaded rods M8 back.
Fix the ropes in the end rope connections without spring and install them on
to the Counterweight suspension point
4148
Use only one piece of clip retainer rope for every one piece of
traction rope! Adhere max. length of rope end!
4149 Interlace ropes into pulleys of car.
Fix ropes in the end rope connections with spring and install them on to the
Car suspension point..
4150
It is possible to use document K 602488 for installing the end rope
connections.

The installation of traction ropes


-

15.10.01 Page 243 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of This table describes the installation of the ropes into the grooves of the
ropes into counterweight pulley ZZR5 and the pulley ZZR7:
pulleys grooves
Installation of ropes into grooves of pulley ZZR5

BG = 400 ... 600 mm


Number of ropes Number of grooves ZZR
ZZ 1 2 3 4 5

15.10.01 Page 244 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The sentence of ropes in grooves

Installation of ropes into grooves of pulley ZZR7

BG = 400 ... 600 mm


Number of ropes Number of grooves ZZR
ZZ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

The sentence of ropes in grooves


-

15.10.01 Page 245 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of 4151 Put the rubber plate [2] and the plate [3] on the yoke [1].
end rope
connections on Install corresponding number of end rope connection without spring [4] to
Counterweight 4152 rubber plate [2], plate [3] and yoke [1]. Tight fast nuts and provide the right
suspension position by split pin [5].
point

The installation of the end rope connections


-

15.10.01 Page 246 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of Start installation of ropes from middle hole always (see picture and table):
ropes to
Counterweight
suspension
point

Number of ropes Number of hole


ZZ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

7
The installation of ropes
Safety end rope Secure the end rope connections for anti moving round by wi - rope d =
connections 4153
4 mm.
4154 Fix wi - rope by wire rope grip.

The safety of end rope connections


-

15.10.01 Page 247 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

End rope
connection
without spring

End rope connection without spring


Note
Use only one piece of clip retainer rope for every one piece of traction rope!

Clip retainer
rope

Clip retainer rope diameter 8 to 11


-

15.10.01 Page 248 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of Install corresponding number of end rope connections [3] to U - profile [1]
end rope 4155
with plate LMS [2].
connections on
Car suspension Rope suspension point is now ready for installation rope and for installation
4156
point of the load measuring system LMS.

The installation of end rope connections


-

15.10.01 Page 249 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of Start installation of ropes from middle hole always (see picture and table):
ropes to Car
suspension point

Number of ropes Number of hole


ZZ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

7
The installation of ropes
(In table values SG are listed, which it is possible to get by using of bracket. The designer must have in mind building tolerances of
hoistway)

Safety end rope Secure the end rope connections by anti moving round by wi - rope d =
connections 4157
4 mm.
4158 Fix wi - rope by wire rope grip.

The safety of end rope connections


(In table values SG are listed, which it is possible to get by using of bracket. The designer must have in mind building tolerances of
hoistway)

15.10.01 Page 250 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

End rope
connection with
spring

End rope connection with spring


-

Clip retainer rope

Clip retainer rope diameter 8 to 11

15.10.01 Page 251 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of STEP 1
ropes to end 4159 Insert the end of the lift rope down through the wedge clamp body, taking up
rope all the slack in the rope.
connections
STEP 2
4160 Thread the end back up through the front side of the wedge clamp body,
leaving just enough loop to install the rope wedge.
STEP 3
4161
Insert the wedge into the loop.
STEP 4
4162 While pulling down on the hoist rope with one hand to keep it taut, pull up on
the loose end with a quick pull until the rope loop and the wedge are seated.
STEP 5
After all ropes are installed, let the weight of the car and counterweight rest
on the ropes. The rope and wedge will rise about 1" to the final "set" under
4163
load. Cut the surplus rope off the tail end after binding so as to leave
approximately a 6" tail. Install an retainer clip to prevent the rope wedge from
slackening in the event the car or counterweight lands on buffers.
STEP 5A (when required - initial equalizing)
If any rope or ropes are tighter, than the rest can be slackened and
4164 equalized by tapping the wedge down until the rope slides, using a hammer
and a drift pin, which is inserted into the top of the clamp body between the
rope and the tail end. Repeat on all tight ropes until all have equal tension.
STEP 6
4165 Equalize final rope tension by adjusting rod nuts while holding the wedge
clamp body to prevent rotation.

The installation of ropes into end rope connections


-

15.10.01 Page 252 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Length of short
ropes end

End rope suspension


-

15.10.01 Page 253 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Rope tension This does not display the absolute rope tension, but a comparative value
among ropes, which allows adjusting the tension of a set of ropes to an
equal level. Unequal tensions lead to different pressures to the traction
sheave grooves, consequently to different rope slip. In some cases, the
4166
results in increased wear out on grooves and ropes. The tension off all ropes
should be rechecked shortly after placing into service, at the latest, after six
weeks. The frequent practice of not checking tension again for six months or
a year can, by that time, lead to unequal and increased wear out.

Mark Description
1 Hook 1
2 Spreader
3 Steel tube
4 Hook 2
5 Spring balance
6 Rope
A Distance from deflection sheave or end fitting at least 1 m
The tension of rope - procedure

K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 254 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Gearless Machine PMS230 INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 11/1999

Section 3-3 Installing Ropes and Rope Retaining Guard

Procedure

Removing traction sheave protection and rope retaining guard


No. Step
Remove the screws and washers [2] on both sides of the traction sheave
357
protection [1] and remove the traction sheave protection.
358 Unscrew the rope retaining guards [3] on both sides of the machine.
Install the ropes onto the traction sheave. Make sure to arrange them as
359
shown in the pictures below.
Re-install and secure the rope retaining guards [3] and the traction sheave
360
protection [1].
-

15.10.01 Page 255 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Note !
It is very important that ropes are arranged on the traction sheave symmetrically to
center line [A] of traction sheave to guarantee both correct load on the bearing and
intended lifetime.
Correct rope
arrangement

Correct arrangement of ropes on the traction sheave for 3, 4, 5, 6,and 7 ropes


Version 01-0, final release / Last edited on July 23, 2001
K 604131 E
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 256 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 4-8 Pit Ladder

Summary The Pit Ladder is used to get in and get out from the pit. The position of the Pit
Ladder is insured by means of limit switch.
The Pit Ladder is supplied in pre-installed condition.
An assembly drawing for the Pit Ladder is document Z 43920000.
-

Installation of No. Step


anchor bolts to
the wall 4167 Put the ladder on the right place in the pit floor by disposition drawings.
Define holes for anchor bolts M12x70 ( oblong holes) and drill holes
4168
(diameter of drill = diameter of anchor bolt).
Install the ladder by means of anchor bolts and tight nuts M12 handily by
4169
ring wrench.

The installation of anchor bolt to the wall


-

15.10.01 Page 257 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Layout Position of the Pit Ladder - the on position [1] and the off position [2]. When
the ladder is in vertically off position and the limit switch touchdown on cam -
4170
the safety circuit is connected. When the ladder is in on position, the safety
circuit is disconnected.

The position of Pit Ladder


K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 258 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 10/2000

Section 3-5 Hoistway Cables English

Summary A new hoistway wiring concept uses modular cable components. The number of
different cable routing methods has thus been reduced to a minimum. For more
detailed information about the new hoistway wiring concept, see the document
"K 604103: Taba / Dispo".
For a detailed view of the cable routing, see the layout drawing.

Caution !
All hoistway cables must be laid in cable ducts (as a rule, use standard 60x60
cable ducts). Secure the cables to the cable duct screw fixings on the wall using
cable ties.
Provide strain relief for cables and make sure that you do not over-tighten
them and damage their insulation!
-

15.10.01 Page 259 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Cable Routing There are two general methods of cable routing:


l For LONL, KTS, SKS und LONG, the cables are routed to the door side with
the landing operating panels, and then in the hoistway edge downwards
(SKS down into the hoistway pit). In case of a second access side, the cables
are routed in the hoistway pit to the second access side and to the door side
with the landing operating panels, and then upwards directly beneath the
panels.
l If there are position indicators on more than one floor, the cable ADIE for
the second access side (with its separate power supply line), if existing, is
directly routed to the second access side in the hoistway headroom.

Line
Description
Type
Left-hand (LONL, KTS, SKS, LONG)
Common cable routing
LON (lift and / or group) to landing elements
SKS (incl. hoistway headroom / hoistway pit)
KTS (hoistway door contacts)
Right-hand (ADIE)
ADIE (position indicator on floors)
Cable Routing
-

15.10.01 Page 260 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Base Set The basic set contains the components required for a simplex installation;
The individual cables LONL, KTS and SKS are tied together with the cables of the
basic set. The entire bundle is always used, even for a second access side -
should there be one - where the SKS cable is not used. The following figure shows
the installation principle (example: Simplex, one access side), followed by a step-
by-step instruction:

15.10.01 Page 261 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Step Component Description


Connect the bundled cabinet outgoing cables with individual
cables LONL, KTS and SKS inside the cabinet (ASIX3 /
Cabinet LRBPL) and route to the side of the panel. Available
outgoing lengths:
1 l 593164: 6 m
cables - basic
set l 593165: 10 m
l 593166: 20 m
Set aside the pit set and the terminals for KTS and - depending on the installation at
hand - KP/KPG for later.

Connect the safety circuit components in the headroom


2 Headroom to the corresponding connectors on the SKS harness of the
cabinet outgoing cable (KBV, KNE-U).
Use the bundled floor set cable with individual harnesses
LONL, KTS and SKS for the connections between floors.
Available lengths:
l 593192: 3.6 m
l 593193: 6 m
3 Basic floor set For longer distances between floors, several floor set
cables are to be connected together to obtain the desired
length.
Note: With cables used to obtain an extension (without
any floor connected), it is essential that KTS be bridged
using the KTS jumper (593249).
Connect the hoistway pit set to the floor set for the bottom
floor (if necessary using an extension) and install and
connect the hoistway components.
l Install the hoistway pit switch JHSG outside the
hoistway door zone so that it is not exposed to any
water at all;
4 Hoistway pit l Connect the safety circuit components in the pit to the
corresponding connectors in the pit set (KLSG, KNE_D
and KSSBV);
l If available, connect the buffer contacts (KP, KPG); if
not, use jumpers;
l Make sure that KTS is terminated with the KTS jumper
if there is only one entrance side.
Using connected floor sets, extend the cables LONL and
Second KTS to reach the side of the panel for the second
(5) entrance entrance (SKS is routed, too, even though it will not be
(where applicable) used). When doing so, with the cables used for extension
always bridge KTS using the KTS jumper (593249).
As in step 3, make the connections between the floors on
Basic floor set
(6) for second the second entrance side (here, too, SKS is routed along
with the other cables, even though it will not be used).
entrance
On the last floor, terminate KTS using the KTS jumper.
The elevator components of the MX Fixtures may now be
Fixtures and
connected in accordance with the specifications in the
indicators,
layout drawing/schematic. Check to make sure that the floor
7 building
numbers are set correctly (see "K 604328").
interface(s),
Other connections are necessary building interface boxes
load
(BIB) with elevator functions as well as load measurement
measurement
in fix point (LONLMS-2).
Laying the basic set
-

15.10.01 Page 262 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Group Bus For elevators in duplex or multiplex installations with group functions, the
LONG cable set is also to be laid. The following figure shows the installation
principle, followed by a step-by-step instruction.

Step Components Description


Connect the cabinet outgoing cable LONG inside the
cabinet (LRBPL) and route it to the side of the panels.
Cabinet
1 Available lengths:
outgoing cable
l 593198: 6 m
LONG
l 593199: 10 m
l 593200: 20 m

Use the floor set cable LONG to interconnect the floors.


Available lengths:
l 593194: 3.6 m
2 Floor set
l 593195: 6 m
LONG
For longer distances between floors, several floor set
cables are to be connected together to obtain the desired
length.
Second Using connected floor sets, extend LONG to reach the side
(3) entrance
(where applicable)
of the panels for the second entrance.
Floor set
(4) LONG for As in step 2, make the connections between the floors on
second the second entrance side.
entrance side
The group elements of the MX Fixtures (LOP) may now be
Fixtures and connected in accordance with the specifications in the
5 indicators, layout drawing/schematic along with any necessary building
building interface boxes (BIB) with group functions. Check to make
interface(s) sure that the floor numbers are set correctly (see
"K 604328").
Laying of LONG
-

15.10.01 Page 263 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Position On elevators with car position indicators on more than one floor, the cable
Indicators set ADIE is also to be laid (installation principle same as for group bus):
Step Components Description
Connect the cabinet outgoing cable ADIE inside the
cabinet (LRBPL) and route it to the side of the fixtures.
Cabinet
1 Available lengths:
outgoing cable
l 593201: 6 m
ADIE
l 593202: 10 m
l 593203: 20 m

Use floor set cable ADIE to interconnect the floors.


Available lengths:
l 593196: 3.6 m
2 Floor set ADIE l 593197: 6 m
For longer distances between floors, several floor set
cables are to be connected together to obtain the desired
length.
Second As in step 1, use the second cabinet outgoing cable to
(3) entrance
(where applicable)
connect the second entrance side.
ADIE floor set
(4) for second As in step 2, make the connections between the floors on
the second entrance side.
entrance
The car position indicators may now be connected in
5 Car position accordance with the specifications in the layout
indicators drawing/schematic. Check to make sure that the floor
numbers are set correctly (see "K 604328").
Laying of ADIE

K 604104 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 31, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 264 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 10/2000

Section 3-7 Building Interface English

Summary The interface with the building options is provided by the Building Interface Box
(BIB), which can operate using either the LON elevator bus or the LON group
bus depending on the type of options. It is delivered pre-configured and includes a
LON backplane (LONCUB) with up to eight option boards (NWRIO4). There may be
several elevator or group BIBs on any one elevator.

Danger !
When installation is finished, under any circumstances close the BIB door, in order
to keep the hoistway free!
-

Installation The BIB is fitted at an appropriate location in the hoistway and mounted onto
the hoistway wall using two screws:

Mounting of BIB
For the exact position, see the layout drawing.
-

15.10.01 Page 265 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Connection Step Action Description


Before making any connections, check the configuration of
1 Switch the NWRIO4 option boards with the relevant option (two
positions hexadecimal switches). The pre-configured switch
positions are indicated on a sticker on the BIB.

2 Connecting The options are to be connected to the corresponding


the options NWRIO4 boards in accordance with the diagram.
The LON connection of the BIB is designed as a T piece -
like a landing panel or indicator - and is mounted between
3 LON the landing sets in the LON bus along with the fixtures
connection and indicators.
Note: Check whether the BIB is to be connected to the
LON elevator bus or the LON group bus.
Connecting the BIB

K 604104 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 31, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 266 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 10/2000

Section 3-1-1 Control Cabinet for MRL English

Summary The cabinet used for machine-roomless installation is located next to the
hoistway door jambs on the top floor or on the floor immediately below. The
cabinet is delivered empty: the modules are to be mounted inside the cabinet
and connected to one another as well as to other components outside the
cabinet. For mounting and wiring of the modules, see the corresponding
subsections in the installation procedure.
-

Placement Under any circumstances the modules must be placed at the locations within
the control cabinet, which are indicated in the drawing. The sequence must
strictly be obeyed!
Overview Sequence Description

1 DM236 module

2 Option module

3 Base module with control PCBs

4 Supply module for control and drive supply

5 Module for brake control

Placement

K 604104 E Version 02, released - last edited on May 30, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 267 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 10/2000

Section 3-1-3 Modules English

Summary Each MRL module is mounted on the cabinet's rear panel with four screws, then
the wiring is connected.
On MR installations, the cabinets are delivered complete with the modules
already mounted and pre-wired.

Caution !
On MRL installations, observe the exact location and sequence specified in
"Section 3-1-1 - Control Cabinet for MRL".
The covers provided for protection against live parts are to be refitted after
installation and before commissioning.
-

Cable Routing

According to their designations, the cables fixed at the modules


must be plugged in at the other modules (see drawing for cable
routing).

Cable routing
MRL / MR
-

Base Module

All cables are routed to the base module, where they are plugged
in.

Fixation
-

15.10.01 Page 268 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Supply Module

The table below describes the wiring between the


supply module and the other modules:
Base /
To Description
option
ASIX.POWIN Power supply . Base module B
BCM.POWIN Power supply . Brake module B
Power supply - Option power
NGO/1/2 O
supply units
Wiring Table

Fixation
-

Brake Module The table below describes the wiring between the brake
module and the other modules:
Base /
To Description
option
ASIX.BCM Brake contact(s) B
ASIX.MGB Safety circuit - Magnetic brake B
Wiring Table
Do not forget to install the noise protection kit
(damping pad between module and cabinet rear wall as
Fixation well as foam protection as module cover to be stuck on
cabinet door from inside)!
-

Option Module

The table below describes the wiring between the


option module and the other modules:
Base/
To Description
option
EBLON.X1 LON group bus O
ASIX.LONL LON lift bus O
Only on elevator 1 for multiplex
ASIX.Ethernet O
installations higher than duplex
Wiring Table

Fixation
-

15.10.01 Page 269 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

DM236 Module

The table below describes the wiring between the


DM236 module and the base module:
Base/
To Description
option
ASIX.POW236 Module supply O
Wiring Table
Fixation

K 604104 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 31, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 270 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Gearless Machine PMS230 INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 11/1999

Section 3-2 Installing the Bowden Cable

Bowden Cable
Overview Picture

Overview of installation and correct routing of the Bowden cable


1. Pipe loop
2. Tubing
3. Wire
4. Eye end
5. Clamp with screws
6. (Brake) levers
-

Danger !
Proper installation and adjustment of the bowden cable is very important to
guarantee that the manual brake release device does not impair the braking
torque.
Reduced braking torque can lead to highly dangerous situations such as the
car moving away from the floor with doors open.
In particular, make sure
l to observe all notes included in the instructions below
l to verify the proper functioning of the manual brake release device,
l to check that the manual brake release lever in the control cabinet is always
secured in its uppermost position when not in use.
-

15.10.01 Page 271 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixation in the No. Step


Control Cabinet
Pull part of the wire [3, Overview Picture] from the tubing [9] of the bowden
339
cable and insert this part into the notch [6].
340 Press the tension spring [5] aside and remove the nut [4].
Withdraw the bolt [2] to the point where you can pass it through the eye [1] of
341
the wire.
Make sure to properly reposition the fixing bracket [3] of the tension spring [5]
342 and secure the bolt [2] with the nut [4]. Insert the end [8] of the tubing all the
way into the opening [7].
Pass the other end of the bowden cable through the opening in the top of the
control cabinet and route it to the machine in a curve (see Overview Picture).
343
Make sure that the bowden cable cannot be touched by the upper
parts of the traveling car and that the bending radius is min. 500 mm.

Fixation of the bowden cable at the manual brake release lever in the control
cabinet (Detail Z of Overview Picture)
-

15.10.01 Page 272 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixation at the Insert the wire into the holes [3] of the levers at the machine, pushing the end
Machine 344
[4] of the tubing all the way into the hole of the first lever.
Pass the wire through the clamp [2] and temporarily lock it with the two
345 screws [1]. Cut the remaining wire end to a length of ca. 180 mm.
Protect the wire end by adhesive tape.
Attach the bowden cable to the hoistway wall using pipe loops [1, Overview
Picture].
346 To guarantee a proper functioning of the manual brake release device,
make sure that the distance between pipe loops is min. 1000 mm and
that the bowden cable can move freely in the pipe loops.

Attaching the bowden cable at the machine (Details X and Y of Overview Picture)
-

Note !
Normally, the bowden cable has the right length. In cases where the bowden cable
is too long, it must be cut to length and the coupling (included in supply) is used.
Cutting to Only if the bowden cable is too long, neatly cut the tubing [4] to length using
Length 347
a hack saw.
Push the cut end all the way into the hole [3] of the coupling and the thinner
348
end [2] of the coupling all the way into the hole [1] of the lever.

Attaching the bowden cable tubing at the machine using the coupling (Detail Y of
Overview Picture)
-

15.10.01 Page 273 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Adjustment 349 Switch the main switch JH to position "Off".


Make sure that the manual brake release lever is held in its uppermost
350 position by the two tension springs and that the tubing end is properly seated
in the opening of the plate
Hold the levers [1] and [2] at the machine with both hands and press them
against each other. It must be possible to move each lever ca. 5 mm.
351
This free movement is important to guarantee that the manual brake
release device does not reduce the braking torque.
If necessary, adjust the bowden cable: Loosen the two screws of the clamp
352 and adjust the position of the wire clamp until the levers can be moved as
required. Retighten the two screws.

Checking free movement of levers


-

15.10.01 Page 274 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Caution !
When using the manual brake release device, be careful that the car does not
overtravel upwards or downwards.
Immediately release the manual brake release lever if the acoustic warning for
overspeed of the car goes on (on the user interface in the control cabinet).
Heavy damages to car, machine or hoistway installation can result by an
overtraveling car.
Verifying Proper Make sure that lift doors are closed and position the empty car at least at one
Functioning 353
floor below.
Briefly pull the manual brake release lever down until the car moves.
Release the lever. Repeat twice, then check free movement again and adjust
354 if necessary.
If the ropes and the car are not yet installed, manually verify that the
traction sheave can be moved freely.
355 Tighten the wire clamp firmly.
Make sure that the manual brake release lever is held in its uppermost
356
position [A] so that the brake is properly closed.

Manual brake release lever in home position A (brake closed) and down position B
(brake open)
Version 01-0, final release / Last edited on July 23, 2001
K 604131 E
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 275 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Gearless Machine PMS230 INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 11/1999

Section 3-4 Connections to Control and Converter

Caution !
For fixation of cables use only the clips provided at the machine casing.
Otherwise cables could be damaged by heat or sharp edges.
-

Wiring Diagram

The sticker on the rear of the machine shows the wiring diagram for the control and
converter connections
-

15.10.01 Page 276 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Connection A WAGO connector is provided at each side of the machine for the connection of
Control the brake board BCM cable of the control. The pin allocation of the two WAGO
connectors is identical.
For more details and schematics refer to document K604104 Miconic MX-GC
Installation, Section 3-3 Machine Room Cables "Elevator Internal Wiring".
-

Connection All cables to the converter are routed to one side of the machine. If the converter is
Converter not located on this side, the cables must be shifted to the side next to the converter.
The machine power cable, the thermal sensor and the fan cable are routed in a
bundle. For EMC reasons, the encoder cable must be routed separetely.
For more details and schematics refer to document K604162 Variodyn
VF22BR/VF33BR Installation, Chapter 5 Electrical Installation.
Version 01-0, final release / Last edited on June 15, 2001
K 604131 E
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 277 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
©03/2000

Chapter 5 Electrical Installation English

Summary After the converter has been installed mechanically, connect the cables from mains
power supply, machine, and control. The images below are for MRL installation.
The wiring is the same for MR installation.

Safety Obey the rules for work safety! This helps to ensure a correct installation and avoid
injury!
l Follow the local work safety regulations for the region!
l Connect one wire only to each terminal of any connector.
l Execute carefully all steps of the procedure as described in this documentation.

Hazardous Voltage !
Before beginning any electrical work make sure that the mains is completely shut
off and there is no residual voltage!
Schematic Here is the overview schematic. For more details, refer to S194411 and S194318.

Connector Schematics
-

15.10.01 Page 278 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Connector
Overview

Cable Connections and Routing


Name Connector
MH Machine power cable (Motor Hoistway)
TDIV Encoder (Tacho Digital Speed)
THMH Thermal Sensor (Thermal Motor Hoisting)
MVE Machine Fan (Motor Ventilator)
RS 422 Controller cable
X15 Connector contact
MAINS Power supply
Connector Description
-

MH No. Step

Standard version:
1. Unscrew retaining screw on MH cable input.
2. Lift out grounding clamp.

MH Cable Input

15.10.01 Page 279 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

3. Open cover completely by pressing along the back side at the same time
as lifting upwards.

Open MH Cover
4. Insert wires into connector block according to the illustration and table
below (lengths are cut to appropriate distances).

500

MH Cable Details
Wire No. Code/Clamp No.
1 U/1
2 V/2
3 W/3
Yellow/Green PE/4
Check that the phases are correctly wired as in the table above,
otherwise the converter cannot be commissioned!
5. Cut open and remove section of insulation (if not already prepared by the
provider), insert in EMI clamp, and screw tight.

15.10.01 Page 280 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

6. Close cover and tighten retaining screw.


Zero-series version:
The zero-series MH cable comes with plug separate. Detailed wiring
instructions are provided in document Montage-Stecker.pdf (in German), also
listed in K 604161 Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR TABA / Dispo Appendix C, List
of Technical Documentation.
1. Mount plug on cable and then insert it into round socket.

Detail MH Plug
2. At converter connection, screw round head of plug tight to ensure proper
contact with casing.
-

TDIV 501 Plug in encoder cable TDIV.


Tighten thumbscrews at the connector (grounding is through the metal shell
502 of plug). Then route cable through grounding block. Do not remove
insulation. Tighten grounding clamp to secure cable.

Detail of Terminal Block with Cable Routing


-

15.10.01 Page 281 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

THMH/MVE Plug in WAGO style 734-104, connector thermal sensor cable THMH, and
503
machine fan cable MVE.

THMH and MVE Housing Connections. Note details of wiring for THMH given below

THMH/MVE pin details: The side plate indicates position of pin 4.

Check that cable MVE is actually the machine fan cable by visually following
it from the machine to the converter plug!

Caution !
Wrong wiring of THMH/MVE cables may destroy the THMH!
-

THMH: Sheathed cable needs to be grounded. At the grounding block, cut


away insulation to expose sheave (if not already prepared by provider), insert
504 in EMI grounding clip and screw tight.
MVE: Sheathed cable does not need to be grounded. Do not remove
insulation. Screw cable to grounding block with clip to hold in place.
-

15.10.01 Page 282 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

RS422 505 Connect cable RS 422, serial communication to controller.

RS422 and TDIV Plugs at Converter

At the grounding block, cut open and remove section of insulation (if not
506
already prepared by the provider), insert in EMI clamp, and screw tight.

Terminal Block Detail


-

X15 507 Plug in unshielded connector contact X15 cable (safety signals to converter).
No grounding necessary. However, tighten thumbscrews on sides of plug to
508
relieve cable tension.

X15 and Mains Connections at Converter


-

15.10.01 Page 283 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

MAINS Strip and clamp in MAINS power supply. Insert wires L1, L2, L3, PE into
terminal block and screw tight.

Wire Description Code


(Terminal Clamp)

1 L1
509
2 L2
3 L3
Yellow/Green PE
No grounding necessary.
Version 01-0, released / Last edited on June 27, 2001
K 604162 E
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 284 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 10/2000

Section 3-4 Traveling Cables English

Summary The Miconic MX-GC is generally only supplied with the base traveling cable.
However, for some options the additional optional traveling cable is required.
For a detailed view of the cable routing, see the layout drawing.
-

Fixation Installation and fastening of the traveling cables in the hoistway and at the car are
explained by means of the figure below (more information on fastening using
wedges can be found in document K 600907 E). Both traveling cables can be fixed
together with one wedge, respectively.
Overview Pos. Description
1 Hoistway

2 Control cabinet

3 Fastening point (wedge) above


on a level with cabinet outlet of traveling cable

Fastening point (wedge) in hoistway middle


4 (at HQ/2)
only required if traveling cable longer than 40 m

Procedure for routing of traveling cable(s):


a. is routed to the side of hoistway
opposite to control cabinet / Motor
b. runs downwards between ropes of
overspeed governor
5 c. runs out below the car in a curve to the
fixation underneath the car
d. is routed back to the side of overspeed
governor / OKR
e. runs upwards along the car wall to the
OKR

6 OKR on the car


located opposite to control cabinet / motor

7 Car

Fastening point (wedge) underneath the car


8 installation of wedge with mounting bracket in tapped holes on
beam underneath the car

Cable Routing
-

15.10.01 Page 285 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Wiring The figure below illustrates the wiring of the base traveling cable. All the
connectors on the boards and on the cables (or, alternatively, the cables
themselves) are marked as shown in the illustration.

Wiring
K 604104 E Version 02, released - last edited on June 30, 2001
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 286 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 10/2000

Section 3-2 Car Wiring English

Summary The OKR is mounted on the car: it is connected on one side to the controller via
the traveling cable, and on the other side to the electrical equipment in the car.
In this respect there is no difference between MR and MRL systems.

Note !
Once installation has been completed, it is important that the cables be
disconnected to obtain a clearly defined initial state for commissioning.
-

Overview The OKR and the mechanics / electrics of the absolute encoder AGSI are fixed with
screws to the fastening rail, which encircles the car roof.

No. Description

1 Mechanics / electrics of absolute encoder AGSI (located on same side as


drive / motor)
2 Maintenance opening in car roof

3 Encircling fastening rail for variable fixation of components with supplied


screws
4 OKR (arrow: opening direction of OKR cover)
Fixation of Components
For the exact position of each component, see the layout drawing.
-

15.10.01 Page 287 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Cable Routing Route and connect the cables as illustrated below (four steps):

No. Step
1 Insert cables
2 Store cables and connect them to LONIC PCB
3 Secure cables
4 Unplug connectors
Cable routing and connection
-

15.10.01 Page 288 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

OKR All car peripherals are routed via the LONIC board inside the OKR and
Connections connected to the controller via the traveling cable (see "Section 3-4: Traveling
Cable"):

Wiring diagram
-

15.10.01 Page 289 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Car Operating Always connect the first car panel on each car to the LONIC board in the OKR.
Panels Connect any additional fixtures in the same car to one another in series:

Connection of car panels


K 604104 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 31, 2001
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 290 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 10/2000

Section 3-6 Hoistway Information English

Summary The shaft information AGSI is an absolute encoder mounted on the car: It
obtains its position through a tensioned toothed belt located in the hoistway.
The absolute encoder - which is also fitted with the cam for the hoistway end
contact KNE-U - and the toothed belt are located on the side of the car/hoistway
opposite the drive. The toothed belt tensioning pulleys are located with the
hoistway end contacts on support plates secured to the guide rails at the top
and bottom of the hoistway.
For the exact position, see the layout drawing! For MRL installation, the
extension for AGSI is additionally required in order to reach sufficient distance from
motor and drive.
-

Mechanical Overview Step Description


Installation

Assemble the upper and lower


mounting sets, which consist of the
following:
l two mounting rails each for
securing the upper and lower
supporting plates to the guide
rail;
l Upper and lower supporting
plates for tensioning pulley and
hoistway end contact;
For MRL installation, the
1 extension for AGSI must be
installed on top of the upper
supporting plate to reach
sufficient distance from motor
and drive!
l Upper and lower tensioning
pulleys for toothed belt;
l Final limit contacts KNE-U
and KNE-D.
Oblong holes on the retaining elements allow
variable positioning for adaptations required as
a result of a different layout concerning the car or
a different position of the absolute value
generator.

Mount the absolute encoder with


cam for final limit contact KNE-U on
2 the car.
The housing may be opened on one side so that
the belt may be inserted.

3 Fit the cam for the final limit contact


KNE-D at the bottom of the car.
Mechanical installation
-

15.10.01 Page 291 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Belt Installation

Step Description
1 Fix toothed belt on upper pulley
2 Route belt through the absolute encoder box on the car
Fix belt provisionally on lower pulley
3 Do not yet apply any additional tension! Execute the following
steps on lower pulley!
4 Mark with pen an engaged pair of belt teeth
Remove fixation and apply additional tension to the belt by moving the two
marks a number of +N teeth apart according to the following table:

Length of Belt [m] N+ F [kg]


(Number of Additional Teeth) (Corresponding Force)
5 15 6 3
24 10 5
45 19 8
80 33 15
6 Fix belt on lower pulley
Belt installation

K 604104 E Version 02, released - last edited on June 30, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 292 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door K 603357 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 INSTALLATION 1-11.3/1

5.9 Adjust door panel & transmission

Standard Version

A
Alignment tool

13

17

Detail A

290047
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Hex M8x10

484948
Washer 8.2
to third parties.

962141

Excenter
962142

Fig. 12

INVENTIO AG Page 14 / 24
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 293 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door K 603347 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 INSTALLATION 1–11.3/1

9. Adjust door panel & transmission

Alignment tool
5 (max 6)

Excenter

13
Y

17

Guide shoe
Alignement
A
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated

Detail A
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

290047
Hex M8x10

484948
Washer 8.2

Y
to third parties.

962141
Excenter
962142

INVENTIO AG Page 12 / 18
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 294 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Varidor 30 INVENTIO AG
INSTALLATION Options for SchindlerEuroLift
© 11/2000

INSTALLATION Options for


SchindlerEuroLift
-

Preparation of
the KUET KIT

Landing Door KUET KIT


1. Position of the magnets for standard landing fixing
2. Position of the magnets for short landing fixing

Landing Car and Landing Doors Panels with


Fixing Similar Height Different Height

Standard

Short

Door Drive KUET KIT


-

15.10.01 Page 295 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixing of the No. Step


KUET KIT
1 a: Connect cable to the 2 plugs of each sensor

Fixing of the KUET KITS


1. Door drive
2. Mechanical transom
3. Landing door KUET KIT (magnets) Mat. Nr. 966273
4. Door drive KUET KIT (sensors) Mat. Nr. 966351
For fixing the door drive KUET support, maintain the nominal gap of 8 mm
2
between magnets and sensors.

15.10.01 Page 296 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Gap between Magnet and Sensor


The door drive and the mechanical transom are drawn in a simplified way in order
to have a good understanding of the KUET installation. Therefore some pieces are
missing on this sketch.
-

15.10.01 Page 297 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Halogen Spot Insert the spots into the whole of the transom.
a. Remove glass cover and caps
3
b. Fix screws
c. Insert the glass cover and caps

[a,b] Fixing the Halogen Spots

[c] Header with Halogen Spots

15.10.01 Page 298 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

For C4 and T2 landing doors, connect the transom cables to the halogen
4
spots according to the following figure.

Cabling C4 and T2 Landing Doors


1. Transformer cable (220 V)
2. Cable for 2 spots (12 V)

15.10.01 Page 299 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

For C2 landing doors, connect the transom cables to the halogen spots
5
according to the following figure.

Top View of the Mechanical Transom

Cabling C4 Landing Doors


1. Transformer cable (220 V)
2. Cable for 2 spots (12 V)
-

Stephané Cocher, BE-


David Lee, R&D-MQ Technical Review Nijs Wernas, MEL
Authorization Authored by:
05,09,2001 Chaired by:
MEL Released by:
01,10,2001yyy
01,10,2001

Restrictions INVENTIO AG This design and information is our intellectual property. It must without our written consent neither be copied in
CH-6052 Hergiswil any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated to third parties.

K 604281 E Version 01, released / Last edited on October 09, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 300 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door / Car Door K 603351 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 MAINTENANCE 1-11.3/1

6.1.2 Check Adjustment of Door Locking Device

Clutch open Clutch closed


0.5

Cam
>0

( 75 ) 53
Door open Door closed
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

completely !

Fig. 13
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 15 / 18
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 301 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door / Car Door K 603351 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 MAINTENANCE 1-11.3/1

6.1.3 Check Adjustment Door Lock Rollers

Alignment tool
Id.No. 962658

control measure 79
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Car A
min. 7

( 70 )
to third parties.

Door Lock Rollers 53


8.5 8.5
75
closed
max. opened bow

Fig. 14

INVENTIO AG Page 16 / 18
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 302 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Center Door C2
Hoistway Door / Car Door K 603351 E 4 / 0128

Lead Office: EB3 Group: 1-11.420 MAINTENANCE 1-11.3/1

6.1.4 Check Belt Tension

Check tooth belt, that expands The drive belt may not sude
about 10 mm to the max. stretch. during the acceleration.

~10mm

Fig. 15

Picture shows standard version


for AP version similar procedure.
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 17 / 18
CH--6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 303 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door / Car Door K 603350 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 MAINTENANCE 1–11.3/1

Y 6.1.3 Check Adjustment of Door Locking Device

Clutch open Clutch closed


0.5

Cam
>0

( 75 )
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated

53
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Door open Door closed


completely !
to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 13 / 16
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 304 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door / Car Door K 603350 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 MAINTENANCE 1–11.3/1

Y 6.1.4 Adjust Door Lock Rollers

The open clutch don’t have


to jam between the rollers
and have not more then
1mm air.

Alignment tool
Id.No. 962658

Car
control measure 79
A
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

min. 7

(70)
A
to third parties.

Door Lock Rollers 8.5 53 8.5


bolt closed
75 max. open bow

INVENTIO AG Page 14 / 16
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 305 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Varidor 30
Telescop Door T2
Hoistway Door / Car Door K 603350 E 1 / 9933

Lead Office: EBI17 Group: 1–11.420 MAINTENANCE 1–11.3/1

6.1.5 Check Tooth Belt

The drive belt may not sude


during the acceleration

Check tooth belt, that expand


~10mm about 10mm to the max. stretch
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Check condition of the transmission rope


to third parties.

INVENTIO AG Page 15 / 16
CH–6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 306 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 7-3 Doors Security

Summary This section explains how to install the photocell or LVH on front wall.
-

Photocell
Installation

Photocell installation
-

15.10.01 Page 307 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Photocell
Adjustment

A. Vertical adjustment
B. Horizontal adjustment

Photocell adjustment
-

15.10.01 Page 308 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

LVH Installation

LVH installation
K 604167 E Last edited on October 09, 2001 / version 03, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 309 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
© 10/2000

Chapter 1 Prerequisites English

Danger ! Hazardous Voltage


l Make sure that you are not working on units which are live (power still on)!
Only when JH, SIL, SIBS and JHO have been turned off can you be sure that
no live units are still turned on in the elevator control cabinet or on/in the car.
l Prior to work on the Elevator control ensure that no voltage is > 50 VAC
l Do not plug in/unplug connectors unless the relevant devices are switched
OFF
l When handling PCBs, always keep to the rules concerning "Handling
MOS/CMOS"

Caution !
l "Recall Travel". Due to no travel limits at the hoistway ends, be very careful
with this mode of travel (the shaft limit switches are bridged during this mode of
travel)
l Bypassing the safety circuit without express instruction is prohibited

Note !
l Personnel are familiar with the product and have corresponding qualifications
acquired through training

Tools Tool Description


l > 25 kΩ/V sensitivity
l up to 1,000 VDDC measuring range
Multimeter l diode test and continuity test
l test leads with insulated probe tips

15.10.01 Page 310 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Overall An overview of the commissioning procedure for the whole SchindlerEurolift ®


Commissioning elevator system is available in K 604105: "Overall Commissioning Miconic MX-GC
with Variodyn VF22/33BR" .

Procedure Execute the commissioning steps in the predefined sequence, and do not go to the
next step until the work detailed in the previous step has been successfully
completed. If anything does not work as expected according to the procedure, refer
to K 604107: "Diagnostics Miconic MX-GC".

Documents Document Number


Customer
Electrical Installation Diagram specific
Overall Commissioning Miconic MX-GC with Variodyn K 604105
VF22/33BR
Diagnostics Miconic MX-GC K 604107

K 604106 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 29, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 311 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
© 10/2000

Chapter 2 Preparation of Elevator Control English

Summary The following steps describe how to prepare the elevator control for Inspection
Travel with Recall (Installation Travel).

Preconditions Required Installation Conditions and Components:


l Installation of the basic components must be completed according to K 604105:
"Complete Commissioning Procedure with VF22/33BR"
l The counterweight has been set so that with manually opened brakes the car
will move upward and with one person in the car, will move downward
l The mechanical brake is adjusted (factory set, see K 604131)
l Depending on the installation method, move the car to a position approximately
1.0 m below the uppermost floor or above the lowest floor.
l Mains power of 3 x 400 V
AC (-14 %, +10 %) / 50Hz is available
l The buffers have been installed and are operational (Oil is filled in)
l The overspeed governor and the safety gear are mounted and operating reliably
l Safety contacts hoistway and car have been installed and wired as far as the
elevator control cabinet (Cables are not yet plugged in)

15.10.01 Page 312 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Car No. Step Remarks


In the elevator control cabinet, check that the following
switches and circuit breakers have been turned off:
l JH Main switch
l SIA Drive circuit breaker
l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker
200 l JLC Car lighting switch
(only with MR variants)
l SIBSHoistway lighting circuit breaker
l JHO Main switch for options
l SIB Brake circuit breaker
l SIS Elevator control circuit breaker
LONIC. Check that the following connectors are
unplugged:
l POWC Power supply (traveling cable)
l LUET Car in door zone signal (traveling cable)
l SKC Car safety circuit (traveling cable)
l TT Telephone wire (traveling cable)
l AGSI Absolute encoder
2 connectors:
l 1 plug to ASIX (traveling cable)
l 1 plug from AGSI
l LONC LON car (traveling cable)
l LONT1 LON door 1
l LONT2 LON door 2
(with 2 entrance sides)
l POWT1Power supply door
l POWT2Power supply door 2 Located in OKR
201 (with 2 entrance sides) (see Appendix A-3)
l SKT1 Safety circuit door 1
l SKT2 Safety circuit door 2
(with 2 entrance sides)
l KF Safety gear contact
l KWL Maintenance hatch contact
l LONTC LON car operating panel(s)
l LC Car lighting
l MVEC Car fan motor
l KUET Shaft information KUET
l 2KUET Shaft information KUET2
(with 2 entrance sides)
l SOA Alarm horn car
l GNT To the car operating panel intercom
(when available)
l RAC Connection car relay alarm
(when available)

OKR. Check that on PCB RECPCB the following RECPCB is


202 connector is unplugged: plugged into the
l KWLMaintenance hatch contact LONIC PCB
LONIC. Plug in the following connectors:
l SKC Safety circuit car (traveling cable)
l SKT1Safety circuit door 1
203 l SKT2Safety circuit door 2 OKR
(see Appendix A-3)
(with 2 entrance sides, if not installed: Bridging Plug)
l KF Safety gear contact
l KNA Jumper must be plugged in
RECPCB is
OKR. On PCB RECPCB plug in the following connector:
204 plugged into the
l KWLMaintenance hatch contact
LONIC PCB

15.10.01 Page 313 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Elevator Remains
Control Cabinet turned on
205 Switch SIA on during the
whole of the
commissioning!
Rotary Switch
Settings:
206 Check the Lift-ID on the user interface (ASIX PCB) Simplex = Lift ID 1
Elevator A = Lift ID 1
Elevator B = Lift ID 2
etc.

Number written
on the Chip
card is the
207 Check that the correct Chip card is on the user interface number of the
installation
schematics
diagram
ASIX. Check that the following connectors are unplugged:
l X15A To the drive
l X15B To the drive
l RS422 Communication drive
l POWCPower supply car (traveling cable)
208 (See Appendix A-1)
l AGSI Absolute encoder (traveling cable)
l LUET Car in door zone signal (traveling cable)
l LONC LON car (traveling cable)
l LONL LON Lift
l BAT Emergency Power Supply

ASIX. Check that the following connector is unplugged: Internal


209 connection
l POWINMains power supply input
(see Appendix A-1)

ASIX. Plug in the following connectors:


l SKS Safety circuit hoistway
l KTS Safety circuit hoistway doors
l SKC Safety circuit car
210 l KUESATo the Aramid rope monitoring (See Appendix A-1)
(only available with Aramid ropes)
l KTHM Thermal contact MR
(only available with KTHM thermal contact machine room)
l BAT Battery Control
ASIX. Check that the following jumpers are set:
l SK1 Jumper
(for SchindlerEuroLift®)
l SK2 Jumper
(for SchindlerEuroLift®)
211 l KV Jumper (See Appendix A-1)
(for SchindlerEuroLift®)
l KUESAJumper Aramid rope monitoring
(must be plugged in only with steel ropes)
l KTHM Jumper thermal contact machine room
(only used when no KTHM)

BCM. Check that the following connectors are unplugged:


212 l MGB Magnetic brake and contact Magnetic brake
l MGB1Magnetic brake 1 and contact 1

Check the supply voltage to switch JH: Elevator power


l Connection 2: Phase L1
213 supply
l Connection 4: Phase L2
3 x 400 VAC
l Connection 6: Phase L3

AS. Turn on the following switches and circuit breakers:

15.10.01 Page 314 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

l JH Main switch
l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker
214 l JLCCar lighting switch
(only with MR variants)
l SIB Brake circuit breaker
l SIS Elevator control circuit breaker
ASIX; Check the supply voltage on POWIN connector
Elevator control and door drive supply 230 VAC
l POWIN:2L1
215 l POWIN:3N (See Appendix A-1)
Car lighting/fan supply 230 VAC
l POWIN:4L2
l POWIN:5N

AS. Turn off the following switches and circuit breakers:


l JH Main switch
216 l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker
l JLCCar lighting switch
(only with MR variants)

217 ASIX; plug in POWIN connector (See Appendix A-1)

All other
On the User Interface, set the switch as follows:
218 switches to
l JMOF = "1" Installation travel switch
position "0"
On the ASIX PCB, set the following switches:
219 l JRH switch to position "Recall Control"
l JHM switch on recall control station to position "Stop"

The boot
sequence
takes approx.
50 seconds! It
Turn on JH
220 is completed
The parameters will be read in from the Chip card
when the 7-
segment
display shows
"0"
GCIO PCB. Check the following LED:
If anything is
l LED ERROR (red) not lit
unclear, refer
221 l LED WDOG (green)blinks
to K 604107:
l LED CPU (green)flickers
"Diagnostics"
l LED STATUS (green)not lit

LED Status
not lit
lit
blinks
undefined

LED "T2" is
only active
when two
entrance sides
are available
Check the displays on the user interface (ASIX PCB):

15.10.01 Page 315 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

7-segment
display shows
the figure
"0" (only with
first
commissioning)

222

223 Turn off JH


Continue with "Overall Commissioning Miconic MX-GC with
224 K 604105
Variodyn VF 22/33BR"

K 604106 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 29, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 316 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
©03/2000

Chapter 1 Prerequisites English

Danger ! Hazardous Voltage


l Prior to work on the FC power unit check with a voltmeter to ensure that the
DC link is completely discharged (0 V).
l Prior to work on the FC ensure that no voltage is > 50 VAC.
l Do not plug in/unplug connectors unless the relevant devices are switched
OFF.
l When handling PCBs always keep to the rules concerning "Handling
MOS/CMOS".
l Bypassing safety circuit without express instruction is prohibited.
-

Caution !
l FC cover must not be removed
n Removing the cover results in loss of warranty claim.
n Exceptions:
¡ "Corrective Action" ordered e.g. field info
¡ After consultation LOC and permission.
n SW Download is possible without removing the cover.
l "Recall Travel". Due to no travel limits at the hoistway ends, be very careful
with this mode of travel (the hoistway limit switches are bridged during this
mode of travel).
-

Note !
l The drive commissioning requires the test "t0" (DC link test), "t1" (current loop
test) and "t3" (detection of rotor zero position).
Since no car, ropes or counterweight is necessary, the mentioned tests can be
carried out prior to the normal commissioning.
l There are no spare parts of the frequency converters VF22BR and VF33BR
available. In case of defective component of the FC, the entire frequency
converter has to be replaced (Id. no. in Maintenance K 604165).
l Personnel has product familiarity and corresponding qualifications acquired
through training.
-

HW and SW This commissioning instruction is based on the following HW and SW


Versions Releases/Versions:
l Miconic MX-GC
ASIX3.QB, GCIOA 360.QA, SW ≤ 1.20
l Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR
PIOVEC 13.P, PVEC 165.NB, SW VecSys ≤ 2.13
-

15.10.01 Page 317 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Procedure Execute the commissioning steps in the predefined sequence, and do not go to
the next step until the work detailed in the previous step has been successfully
completed. If anything does not work as expected according to the procedure refer
to Diagnostics K 604164.
-

Overall An overview of the commissioning procedure for the whole SchindlerEuroLift ®


Commissioning elevator system is available in "Overall Commissioning Miconic MX-GC with
Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR" K 604105.
-

Documents Document Number


Schematic circuit diagram
Overall Commissioning Miconic MX-GC with Variodyn K 604105
VF22BR/VF33BR
Diagnostics Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR K 604164
Documents required
-

Tool Tool Description


Multimeter l With > 25 kΩ/V sensitivity
l Up to 1000 VDC measuring range
l Diode test and continuity test
l Test leads with insulated probe tips
Tool required

K 604163 E Version 01-0, released - last edited on June 27, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 318 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
©03/2000

Section 2-1 Preconditions English

Required The following components must be installed:


Components l Matching transformer if mains does not match the range 380..415 VAC
l Cabinet AS including supply module, brake module, base module
l Recall control station ESE placed on ASIX3
l Frequency converter
l Overspeed governor with governor rope
l Hoisting motor MH
l Sinus transmitter/encoder SINCOS 2048 ENDAT (motor/speed tacho with
absolut position)
l Safety circuit
l OKR with inspection control station.
-

Required The following conditions must be fullfilled:


Installations l Cabinet installed according to Installation K 604104 (Miconic MX-GC).
l Mains of 3 x 380..415 VAC (-15 %, +10 %) connected in cabinet.
l Wiring and cabling between cabinet and frequency converter installed in
accordance with installation wiring diagram K 604162.
l Wiring and cabling between frequency converter and hoisting motor installed in
accordance with installation wiring diagram K 604162.
l Sinus transmitter/encoder SINCOS 2048 ENDAT (motor/speed tacho with
absolut position)
l All connectors on frequency converter inserted according to installation
document K 604162.
l Cable shielding grounded according to installation document K 604162.
l Buffers installed and in working order.
l Overspeed governor and safety gear installed and in working order.
l Safety circuit in the hoistway head and to the hoistway doors installed.
l Counterweight filled in so that with open brake the car will move upwards
and with one person in the car, will move downwards.
l The mechanical brake has been adjusted in the factory and must not be
readjusted.
l Preparatory steps "Preparation of Elevator Control" have been executed
according to Commissioning K 604106 (Miconic MX-GC).

K 604163 E Version 01-0, released - last edited on May 18, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 319 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
©03/2000

Section 2-2 Preparation in Cabinet English

JH, JHM No. Step Remarks


AS, check that:
200 l JH is still OFF
l JHM is still pressed (pos. STOP)

X15 AS; ASIX3, check that the following connectors are still Protection against
unplugged: unintentional
201 l X15A switching ON
l X15B
Appendix A-2
-

Recall 202 AS, check that JRH is still on position "RECALL"


-

JMOF AS; ASIX3, check that JMOF is still on position "1" Appendix A-2
203
(IMOF)

K 604163 E Version 01-0, released - last edited on May 17, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 320 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
©03/2000

Section 2-3 Parametrisation Motor Control English

Check VecSys No. Step Remarks


FC, check that all cables on FC are inserted in
204 accordance with schematic circuit diagram and
installation document K 604162
205 AS, switch JH ON
-

Preparation The LED display explained in this step are only Else refer to
Elevator valid for first commissioning. Diagnostics
Control K 604164
FC; PIOVEC, check that the status of the LEDs are as
206 follows: Appendix A-5
l LED ERROR (red) OFF
l LED OK (green) OFF
l LED PARAMETER (yellow) ON (parameter missing)
207 FC; PVEC, check that all LEDs are OFF Appendix A-5
208 AS, switch JH OFF
AS; ASIX3, plug in RS422 Communication
209 ASIX3 to PIOVEC
Appendix A-2
AS, switch JH ON and wait until boot sequence is Else: car position
finished and display on MX-UI shows: (floor number) is
displayed
210

"0" is only displayed at first commissioning before


"Learning Travel"
-

15.10.01 Page 321 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Send Parameters AS; GCIOA 360, execute a "Double Reset" on Precautionary


to Motor Control GCIOA 360 PCB (press Reset - wait until the red LED measure
(VecSys)
211 goes off - press Reset again) Appendix A-3
Wait ~ 40 seconds! "Travel control" now sends
drive parameters to FC (PVEC).
FC; PIOVEC, check that the status of the LEDs are as Else refer to
follows: Diagnostics
l LED ERROR (red) OFF K 604164
l LED OK (green) OFF
Appendix A-5
212 l LED PARAMETER (yellow) ON (still one parameter
missing)

Since there is still one parameter missing


(depending on test "t3") the LED display on
PIOVEC PCB do not yet change.
FC; PVEC, check that all LEDs are OFF Else refer to
Diagnostics
213 K 604164
Appendix A-5
214 AS, switch JH OFF

K 604163 E Version 01-0, released - last edited on June 27, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 322 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
©03/2000

Section 2-4-1 Brake English

Note !
The mech. brake has been factory adjusted and must not be readjusted.
Exceptions: Brake check unsuccessful during acceptance test or maintenance.
-

Preparation BCM No. Step Remarks


215 AS, ensure that JH is still OFF
AS; BCM (brake module), check that the following cables
are still unplugged:
216
l MGB
l MGB1

BCM; MGB (and MGB1), check that the coils of Schematic circuit
MGB/MGB1 are connected properly: diagram
217 l Pin 1 - 2 approx. 26 Ω
l Pin 1 - ground ∞Ω
l Pin 2 - ground ∞Ω
BCM, check the operation of contacts KB and KB1 with
an ohmmeter:
218 not activated activated
KB: Connector MGB Pin 3 - 4 0Ω ∞Ω
KB1: Connector MGB1 Pin 3 - 4 ∞Ω 0Ω

Test Functioning BCM, plug in the following connectors:


of BCM 219 l MGB
l MGB1

220 AS, switch JH ON


AS; BCM, check that LED on BCM show as follows:
221 KB KB1
LED KB/KB1 on BCM ON OFF

222 AS, switch JH OFF

K 604163 E Version 01-0, released - last edited on May 18, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 323 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
©03/2000

Section 2-4-2 "Motor Control" Testfunctions English

Preparation AS, No. Step Remarks


ASIX3
223 AS, ensure that JH is still OFF Safety reasons
Depending on the installation method, move the car to a Preparation for
position approximately 1.0 m below the uppermost floor test "t3" (when the
224
or 1.0 m above the lowest floor car moves for the
first time)
AS; ASIX3, ensure that: Safety reasons
l JHM is still pressed (pos. STOP)
225 Appendix A-2
l JRH is still on position "RECALL" and JMOF on
position "1"
AS; ASIX3, plug in the following connectors: Appendix A-2
l X15A (Supply coil SH: RSH via RSK - RSK1 to
226 SHA1 and feedback to PIOVEC)
l X15B (Feedback from MGB via RB(ASIX3) - RSK1
(ASIX3) - RSK(ASIX3) - SH back to MGB)
-

Danger !
l Safety circuit is installed and its functioning is verified.
l Bypassing safety circuit without express instruction is prohibited.
-

Safety Circuit AS; ASIX3, check that the safety circuit is installed and Appendix A-2
connected according to the schematic circuit diagram:

227

AS; ASIX3, check that JMOF is still on position "1"


228
(IMOF)
-

15.10.01 Page 324 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Parameters 229 AS, switch JH ON


FC and MH
MX-UI, ensure that the parameter values (settings) of
frequency converter FC (Parameter P1, P96) and hoisting
motor MH (P2) are correct
Procedure for Parameter Verification
l Press the "P" key (a parameter will be displayed)
l Select the number of the parameter using the "+/-"
keys
l Press the "P" key again (the value of the parameter
will be displayed)
(If necessary, change the value of the parameter
using the "+/-" keys)
l Only in case the parameter value has been changed:
Press the "P" key again (the actual value will be
cleared and replaced by the new value)
l Leave "Parameters" by pressing the "MA" key

Nb. P. Name Unit Parameter Values


P1 Inverter 1/2 Check the type of FC installed:
Setting "1" for VF22BR
"2" for VF33BR
P2 Motor Type XXXX Check the type of hoisting motor installed. The last
230 4 digits of the motor Id. no. are relevant:
4565: PMS230-A1060 - Id. no. 144565
4566: PMS230-B860 - Id. no. 144566
4567: PMS230-C676 - Id. no. 144567
4568: PMS230-C540 - Id. no. 144568
P96 Phase Dir 0/1 MH on the left side: MH on the right side:
Traction sheave rotating Traction sheave rotating
counter-clockwise clockwise corresponds
corresponds to direction up
to direction up

Value of P96: "0" Value of P96: "1"

Note !
The value of P96 cannot be changed as long as the yellow LED PARAMETER is lit
and the green LED OK is not lit. That means that all parameters (including the
parameter determined out of test "t3") have to have a valid parameter value (see
Diagnostics K 604164 "Fault Rectification according to Symptoms").
-

15.10.01 Page 325 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Tests AS: Safety circuit


231 l Release JHM closed
l Check that the LEDs T1..T5 on MX-UI are ON
Appendix A-2
232 AS; GCIOA 360, execute a "Reset" Appendix A-3
-

Note !
Test Procedure for All Tests
The description of test "t0" serves as example for all test procedures which are not
specifically explained.
-

Test "t0" MX-UI, execute test "t0". Proceed according to the DC link test
233 following test procedure example
Appendix A-4
234 Activate test mode by pressing the "T" key on MX-UI
Select test "t0" using the "+/-" keys
235

Activate test by pressing the "T" key If required,


reforming will be
done
automatically

236

The display on MX-UI shows as follows:

Wait until the display on MX-UI shows as follows: DC link test


successfully
completed
237
Else refer to
Diagnostics
K 604164
238 Reactivate test mode by pressing the "T" key on MX-UI
-

15.10.01 Page 326 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Test "t1" MX-UI, execute test "t1". Proceed as for test "t0" (test Current loop test,
239 procedure example for all tests) symmetry test and
inductance test
Wait until the display on MX-UI shows as follows: Test "t1"
successfully
completed
240
Else refer to
Diagnostics
K 604164
-

Note !
l Do not execute test "t2".
l If test "t3" has been interrupted by opening the safety circuit, an unauthorized
event or broke off itself, leave the test procedure by pressing the "MA" key on
MX-UI and restart test "t3". If restart is not possible, execute a "Reset" (JH OFF
- ON).
-

Test "t3" MX-UI, execute test "t3". Proceed as for test "t0" Zero position
241
detection test
-

Note !
The following 4 steps are only valid with SW Miconic MX-GC < 1.20 and VecSys
< 2.13. Else continue with step 246.
-

Only with SW The display shows as follows:


Miconic MX-GC
< 1.20 and 242
VecSys < 2.13

Press "T" key. The display shows as follows:


243

Press "T" key. The display shows as follows:


244

245 Press "T" key


-

15.10.01 Page 327 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Continuation The LEDs on MX-UI now display: RSK OFF Ready for test
Test "t3" RSK1 OFF travels
VRSK OFF
246 The display will show as follows:

ASIX3, press DRH-D/U and do not release the button until Depending on
the LEDs RSK, RSK1 and VRSK go off (car makes an the button
automatic stop) pressed, the car
247
The LEDs on MX-UI now display: RSK ON OFF runs in the
RSK1 ON OFF forseen direction
VRSK ON OFF
Wait 3 seconds. After that, execute the next travel by
248
pushing DRH-D/U
Repeat mentioned travel, inclusive waiting time, as many Max. 25 travels
times as necessary until the display on MX-UI shows as
follows: Else refer to
249 Diagnostics
K 604164

FC; PIOVEC, check that the status of the LEDs are as Else refer to
follows: Diagnostics
l LED ERROR (red) OFF K 604164
l LED OK (green) ON
250 Appendix A-5
l LED PARAMETER (yellow) OFF
LED "OK" ON indicates that VecSys contains all
necessary parameters.
-

Note !
Do not execute test "t4".
-

Save Parameters After the test "t3" has been successfully finished, press In case of re-
the "MA" key. The display shows as follows: commissioning
(learning travel
already executed)
251
the display shows
the floor number
where the car is
located
Once all "Motor Control" parameters have been set, give Saves the
the command "EndCo" (End Commissioning) which is parameters in the
found at the end of "Parameters". Flash EPROM on
Procedure: Press "P" key and "+/-" key until "EndCo" GCIOA 360
appears. Then confirm by pressing "P" key again
252

15.10.01 Page 328 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Recall and After pressing


Increase/decrease "V-Recall":
Inspection Speed DRH-D/U for a
Setting maximum of 20
seconds, min/max
"Recall Travel"
speed will be
reached
253

1. JHM pressed
2. Depending on the desired speed,
press DRH-D (decrease) / DRH-U (increase) for a
shorter or longer time
3. Release JHM. "V-Recall" is decreased/increased
Set "V-Recall" back to CADI value: "V-Recall" is
normal again

254

1. JHM pressed
2. JRH to "Normal"
3. JRH back to "Recall"
4. Release JHM
Increase/decrease "V-Inspection":
255
Procedure with Inspection Panel same as for "V-Recall"
256 AS, switch JH OFF

K 604163 E Version 01-0, released - last edited on June 27, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 329 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
©03/2000

Section 2-5 Functional Checks English

FC Ventilation No. Step Remarks


257 AS, switch JH ON
AS; ASIX3: Appendix A-2
l Press DRH-D: Car travels downwards
258
l Press DRH-U: Car travels upwards
l During recall travel, check the functioning of JHM

FC, check the air flow. Air outlet


Execute 10 short travels using "Recall Control" with no
259 time delay between the travels (ventilation activated). The
air must flow from beneath the FC through the device and Air inlet
leave on top
-

MH Air Flow MH, check the air flow of MH. Both fans blow
Unplug, then plug in the THMH/MVE connector again. the air into MH
Now check that the hoisting motor air flow is correct

260

261 AS, switch JH OFF


-

Danger !
It is absolutely forbidden to run the car with bridged safety circuit without express
instruction.
-

Note !
Continue according to document "Overall Commissioning Miconic MX-GC with
Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR" K 604105.

K 604163 E Version 01-0, released - last edited on May 18, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 330 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
© 10/2000

Section 3-1 Preparation English

Elevator No. Step Remarks


Control Cabinet
All of the previous steps in the complete commissioning
300 See K 604105
procedure have been carried out
Check that the JMOF switch on the user interface (UI) is
301
still in position "1" and turn JH on.
Check the displays on the user interface (ASIX PCB):

LED Status
not lit
lit
blinks
undefined

LED T2 is only
active when two
302 entrance sides
are available

7-segment display
shows the figure
"0" (only with first
commissioning)

303 Turn off JH


ASIX. Plug in the following connectors:
304 l POWC Power supply car (traveling cable) (See Appendix A-1)
l LONC LON car (traveling cable)
Traveling cable
305 LONIC; Plug in LONC connector communication
LONIC
AS. Turn on the following connectors and circuit
breakers: The boot
sequence takes
306 l JH Main switch
l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker approx. 50
l JLC Car lighting switch seconds!
(only with MR variants)

15.10.01 Page 331 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Car LONIC; Check the supply voltage on the POWC


connector
l POWC:1 N
(from SIL) Traveling cable:
l POWC:2 L2 LONIC supply
307 l POWC:3 N 230 VAC and
(from SIS)
l POWC:4 L1 24 VDC
l POWC:5 PE (see Appendix A-3)
l POWC:6 +24 V
(from NGL)
l POWC:7 0V
AS. Turn off the following switches and circuit breakers:
l JH Main switch
308 l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker
l JLC Car lighting switch
(only with MR variants)

LONIC; Plug in POWC connector


(LONIC supply 230 VAC and 24 VDC)
309 (See Appendix A-3)
LONIC; Plug in LC connector
(car lighting)
Attention:
310 In the elevator control cabinet, turn on JH LONIC is live!
Important:
Check the display on the LONIC PCB: If the LED “Appl”
Status/Error LED remains off,
311 perform a double
l 24 V (green) lit
l APPL (green) blinks - communication ok. reset on the
GCIOA PCB.

K 604106 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 29, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 332 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
© 10/2000

Section 3-2 Check Inspection Travel with IMOF English

Checks No. Step Remarks


312 Set JREC switch to position "INSP" On car (OKR)
Press DREC-D: car should travel downwards
313
Press DREC-U: car should travel upwards
Carry out an inspection travel and check the operation of
314
JHC
Check the operation of the contacts in the safety See installation
315 circuit
wiring schematics
316 Set JREC switch to position "NORM"
317 In the elevator control cabinet, turn off JH

K 604106 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 08, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 333 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
© 10/2000

Section 3-3 Preparation for Commissioning Door Drive English

Procedure No. Step Remarks


LONIC. Plug in the following connectors
l LONT1 LON Door 1
l LONT2 LON Door 2
(with 2 entrance sides)
l POWT1 Power supply door 1
l POWT2 Power supply door 2 On car (OKR)
318 (with 2 entrance sides) (see Appendix A-3)
l On the LONIBV PCB with the Varidor 30 door drive,
enter the following settings for the two sliding
switches:
l Entrance side 1: SZ1
l Entrance side 2: SZ2

Continue with "Overall Commissioning Miconic MX-GC


319 K 604105
with Variodyn VF 22/33BR"

K 604106 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 08, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 334 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Small Service Module SSM
VARIDOR 30 Commissioning
K 603349 E 1 / 9852

Lead Office: EBI 17 Group: 1–11.530 COMMISSIONING 1–11.1/1

Y5 Varidor 30 Commissioning

Y 5.1 Preparation

Step Description Display / Status


No.
1 Remove protective cover from electronics box

2 Turn JH main switch and door drive switch off

Y 3 Plug in the control connectors in electronics box


Miconic LX Miconic SX / TX X3

X2 X2
X5 X6
X4 X4
X11

X11
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

X9 X9

X10
X10
to third parties.

4 Turn JH main switch and door drive switch on


Form. EBI844 201 E96
k603349e

INVENTIO AG Page 8 / 19
CH-6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 335 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Small Service Module SSM
VARIDOR 30 Commissioning
K 603349 E 1 / 9852

Lead Office: EBI 17 Group: 1–11.530 COMMISSIONING 1–11.1/1

Y 5.2 Initial Startup

Initial startup need be performed only during initial commissioning.

It is very important to confirm all initial menus (see step 5 to 9), then the menu “Status:
closed” must appear. If not, all steps must be repeated.

Y Step Description Display / status


No.
1 Switch inspection control panel to “Inspection”
“Inspection”

2 Turn SSM on
SCHINDLER SSM 1.X

On

3 Hold SSM in receiving range of infrared cone Inspec: closed


The green LED on SSM should light (= con- x= < 0> mm
nection)
On

4 Wait until “Inspec: closed or stopped” mode Inspec: closed


appears x= < 0> mm
5 Confirm door closed position Set close pos.
Lust VF1204S ! x=<2> x= < 2> mm
Hanning CCI1100 ! x=<0> Enter Enter
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

6 Confirm door open position Set open pos.


(x = BKE for telescopic door, BKE/2 for center– x= < 350> mm
opening doors)
Enter Enter
to third parties. Form. EBI844 201 E96
k603349e

INVENTIO AG Page 9 / 19
CH-6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 336 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Small Service Module SSM
VARIDOR 30 Commissioning
K 603349 E 1 / 9852

Lead Office: EBI 17 Group: 1–11.530 COMMISSIONING 1–11.1/1

Initial Startup continued

Y Step Description Display / status


No.
7 Confirm door closing speed Set closg speed
v= < 250> mm/s

Enter Enter

8 Confirm door opening speed Set openg speed


v= < 250> mm/s

Enter Enter

9 Confirm closing force Set closing force


Lust VF1204S ! < 18 > < 18> Units
Hanning CCI1100 ! < 10 > Enter Enter Esc Esc

10 Finish initial startup Status: closed


(if the display does not appear as shown, x= < 2> mm
all steps must be repeated.)

11 Exit inspection mode Control = <1>


0=Lift 1=SSM

Enter Enter

12 Return to status menu Control = <0>


0=Lift 1=SSM

Esc

13 Press Esc and Enter simultaneously to turn Status: closed


SSM off x= < 2> mm
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Esc Enter

14 Switch converter off if work is discontinued


for an extended period
to third parties. Form. EBI844 201 E96
k603349e

INVENTIO AG Page 10 / 19
CH-6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 337 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Small Service Module SSM
VARIDOR 30 Commissioning
K 603349 E 1 / 9852

Lead Office: EBI 17 Group: 1–11.530 COMMISSIONING 1–11.1/1

Y 5.3 Synchronization

The system must be synchronized following every power failure.


The system can perform a synchronization automatically in normal operation.

The door is moved until it strikes a mechanical object.

Y Step Description Display / Status


No.
1 Switch converter on
2 Switch SSM on
SCHINDLER SSM 1.X

On

3 Hold SSM in reception area of infrared cone Status: closed


(green LED on SSM should light) x= < 2> mm

On

4 Set control mode to “SSM”


Control = <0>
(Control = 1)
0=Lift 1= SSM
Note: Door can now be controlled only with
SSM.
Enter Enter

Control = <1>
0=Lift 1= SSM

Status: closed
Esc
x= < 2> mm
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated

5 Perform “opening” synchronization travel.


This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Status: open
Note: If door does not open, check direction x= < 350> mm
of rotation of motor in “motor rotation” param-
eter
6 Perform “closing” synchronization travel.
Status: closed
x= < 2> mm
7 Set control mode to “Lift”
Control = <0>
(Control = 0)
to third parties.

0=Lift 1= SSM
Note: Control mode need not be changed if
commissioning is continued with “Setting End
Positions”.
Form. EBI844 201 E96
k603349e

INVENTIO AG Page 11 / 19
CH-6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 338 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Small Service Module SSM
VARIDOR 30 Commissioning
K 603349 E 1 / 9852

Lead Office: EBI 17 Group: 1–11.530 COMMISSIONING 1–11.1/1

5.4 Setting End Positions

Y Step Description Display / Status


No.
1 Switch SSM on
SCHINDLER SSM 1.X

On

2 Hold SSM in reception area of infrared cone SCHINDLER SSM 1.X


(green LED on SSM should light)

On

3 Switch control mode to “SSM”


Control = <1>
(Control = 1)
0=Lift 1= SSM
4 Set door open position
Door must be open, flush with door jambs
Note: Opening motion must not be synchro-
nized!

Increase or decrease value x by measured


difference
x

Set open pos.


x= < 800> mm

Enter 0-9 Enter

5 Check door open position


any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Esc

6 Set door closed position


(Door must not be blocked by mechanical
components!) 1-2 mm
Maintain gap of 1 to 2 mm

Lust VF1204S !
to third parties.

x=<2>
Hanning CCI1100 ! x=<0> Set close pos.
x= < 2> mm

Enter 0-9 Enter


Form. EBI844 201 E96
k603349e

INVENTIO AG Page 12 / 19
CH-6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 339 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Small Service Module SSM
VARIDOR 30 Commissioning
K 603349 E 1 / 9852

Lead Office: EBI 17 Group: 1–11.530 COMMISSIONING 1–11.1/1

Setting End Positions continued

7 Check mechanical interlock setting


8 Set control mode to “Lift”
Control = <0>
(Control = 0)
0=Lift 1= SSM
Note: Control mode need not be changed
over if commissioning is continued with “Fine
Adjustments”.

Y 5.5 Fine Adjustments

Y Step Description Display / Status


No.
1 Switch SSM on
SCHINDLER SSM 1.X

On

2 Hold SSM in reception area of infrared cone SCHINDLER SSM 1.X


(green LED on SSM should light)

On

3 Switch control mode to “SSM”


Control = <1>
(Control = 1)
0=Lift 1= SSM
4 openg speed

See chapter 4.1 and 4.2 for explanation of opg lckg speed
parameters
deceleration
acceleration

closg speed
cls lckg speed acceleration
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

deceleration
25 cm BKE - 20 cm
(BKE/2 - 20 cm)

Set closing speed Set closg speed


0 ... 600 mm/s v= < 250> mm/s
Maximum allowable closing force is exceed- Enter Enter
0-9
to third parties.

ed if closing speed is too high


Form. EBI844 201 E96
k603349e

INVENTIO AG Page 13 / 19
CH-6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 340 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Small Service Module SSM
VARIDOR 30 Commissioning
K 603349 E 1 / 9852

Lead Office: EBI 17 Group: 1–11.530 COMMISSIONING 1–11.1/1

Fine Adjustments, continued

Y Step Description Display / Status


No.
5 Set opening speed Set openg speed
0 ... 600 mm/s v= < 250> mm/s

Enter 0-9 Enter

6 Set locking distance Set lockg dist


0 ... 30 mm x= < 25> mm
Enter 0-9 Enter

7 Set closing locking speed Set cls lckg speed


0 ... 100 mm/s v= < 40> mm/s

Enter 0-9 Enter

8 Set opening locking speed Set opng lckg speed


0 ... 100 mm/s v= < 60> mm/s

Enter 0-9 Enter

9 Set deceleration SPECIAL FUNCTIONS


0 ... 700 mm/s2
Deceleration is valid for both opening and
closing
Set deceleration
a= < 400> mm/s2

Enter 0-9 Enter

10 Set acceleration Set acceleration


0 ... 700 mm/s2 a= < 500> mm/s2
Acceleration is valid for both opening and
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Enter 0-9 Enter


closing
11 Exit “Special Functions” menu Status closed
Esc Esc
x= < 2> mm
12 Set control mode to “Lift”
Control = <0>
(Control = 0)
0=Lift 1= SSM
13 Switch inspection control panel to “Normal” “Normal”
to third parties. Form. EBI844 201 E96
k603349e

INVENTIO AG Page 14 / 19
CH-6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 341 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Small Service Module SSM
VARIDOR 30 Commissioning
K 603349 E 1 / 9852

Lead Office: EBI 17 Group: 1–11.530 COMMISSIONING 1–11.1/1

Y 5.6 Setting Closing Force Limiter

Step Description Display / Status


No.
1 Measure closing force with elevator in normal
operation
Closing force must be measured in the rated
speed range!
2 No setting required if measured closing force
does not exceed 150 N
Continue with these instructions if measured
closing force exceeds 150 N
3 Switch SSM on
SCHINDLER SSM 1.X

On

4 Hold SSM in reception area of infrared zone SCHINDLER SSM 1.X


(green LED on SSM should light)

On

5 Set control mode to “SSM”


Control = <1>
(Control = 1) Esc
0=Lift 1= SSM
6 Select the closing force menu

7 Decrease the value of closing force Set closg force


Lust VF1204S ! < 18 > < 18> Units
Hanning CCI1100 ! < 10 >
Enter 0-9 Enter

8 Set control mode to “Lift”


Control = <0>
(Control = 0)
0=Lift 1= SSM
9 Recheck closing force and reset if required
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

10 - only Lust VF1204S:


Door moves in the opening direction and
stops during the locking speed
See diagnostic chapter 6.4 (page 19)
- only Hanning CCI1100:
Door moves in the closing direction and
stops during the acceleration.
to third parties.

Closing force must be remeasured if the acceleration, deceleration or door speed param-
eters are changed.

The closing force limiter must also be active during synchronization and shall not exceed
the maximum closing force.
Form. EBI844 201 E96
k603349e

INVENTIO AG Page 15 / 19
CH-6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 342 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
Small Service Module SSM
VARIDOR 30 Commissioning
K 603349 E 1 / 9852

Lead Office: EBI 17 Group: 1–11.530 COMMISSIONING 1–11.1/1

5.7 Concluding Work

Step Description Display / Status


No.
1 Attach protective cover to electronics box

Check operation of reversing devices (DT-O, Progard L, light barrier).

Y 5.8 Check Statistics

Y Step Description Display / Status


No.
1 Switch SSM on
SCHINDLER SSM 1.X

On

2 Hold SSM in reception area of infrared cone SCHINDLER SSM 1.X


(green LED on SSM should light)
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

On

3 Select “Special Functions” menu SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

4 Select “Statistics” menu Statistics


to third parties.

5 Select desired display Opening detec.


Form. EBI844 201 E96
k603349e

INVENTIO AG Page 16 / 19
CH-6052 Hergiswil
15.10.01 Page 343 of 451
â
SchindlerEuroLift INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
INVENTIO AG
CH–6052 Hergiswil PROGARD L LVH 24sd K 603089 E Page 26

HC INSTALLATION S– / C– 1–11.2/2

6 Commissioning
Emitter or receiver strip

3 mm
Procedure:
D Check the installation of the strips for
Y – Angular error (max"10°)
– Contact with items fitted in hoistway

10
D Check the LVH
– Functional indications Fig. 26 Maximum Angular Error

Green LED Yellow LED State Meaning

Green LED only lit Supply voltage on (normal state)

Supply voltage on, one or more beams


Green and yellow LEDs lit
are interrupted.

= LED lit = LED not lit

Tab. 4 Functional Indications


D Test operation of LVH: Break beam grid as door is closing
⇒ Door should reverse
D Make an inspection travel covering all the floors.

7 Fault Diagnosis
Symptom Green Yellow Cause Possible Remedy
LED LED
Not working, No supply Check power supply
door open Fuse blown or faulty Change fuse
Check installed positions and
Light beam interrupted /
cables
Beam grid not angular error
Replace control unit
interrupted, Control unit faulty
Mask off or remove IR source
door open Extraneous IR sources, e.g. sun,
or interchange the strips
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

lamps, light barriers


Fir lateral masking strip
Check beam grid
Light beam is being interrupted Check installed positions
sporadically Clean connectors and sock-
Switches Angular error ets
sporadically Intermittent connector contact Ground strips
Strips not grounded Mask off or remove
Extraneous IR sources IR sources
Fit lateral masking strip
to third parties.

Receiver strip faulty or Replace or plug


Not working not correctly plugged in in correctly
Strip fouled Clean strip
Transmitter strip faulty or Replace or plug
Not working not correctly plugged in in correctly
Strip fouled Clean strip

= LED lit = LED flashing = LED not lit

Modification: 1
Date: 9822
15.10.01 Page 344 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
INVENTIO AG
CH–6052 Hergiswil PROGARD L LVH 24sd K 603089 E Page 27

HC INSTALLATION S– / C– 1–11.2/2

Symptom Green Yellow Cause Possible Remedy


LED LED
Transmitter and receiver strips Replace, clean or
Not working faulty, fouled or not plugged in plug in correctly
correctly interchange the strips
Door open, Beam grid interrupted for more
Remove obstruction
buzzer sounding than 5 minutes

= LED lit = LED flashing = LED not lit

Tab. 5 Indications for Fault Diagnosis Purposes


Other possible faults:

Symptom Cause Possible Remedy


If the clicking is not a nui-
Light curtain is detecting obstruc-
Relay clicks during travel sance, do not change any-
tions, e.g. hoistway door rollers
thing.
Light curtain is detecting obstruc-
Buzzer sounds during travel Switch buzzer to OFF
tions, e.g. hoistway door rollers
Move control unit
Door drive motor causing interfer-
Prove RC module of door
Door will not stop reversing ence in control unit
drive motor
Effect of extraneous light Fit lateral masking strips

Tab. 6 Other Possible Faults

8 Spare Parts
The following parts are available as spares:

Description Id.–No.
Complete LVH 24sd 184 038
Control unit for LVH 24sd 184 052
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Transmitter strip for LVH 24sd 184 053


Receiver strip for LVH 24sd 184 054
Cable LVH–terminal box 184 055

Tab. 7 Spare Parts


to third parties.

Modification: 1
Date: 9822
15.10.01 Page 345 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

MX Fixtures INVENTIO AG
INSTALLATION
© 07/2001

Section 3-1 COP Standard

Procedure No. Step


Attach wall fixing elements to car walls on both sides of COP location:

300

Rear View of Car Wall

15.10.01 Page 346 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fix COP box on wall fixings.


Do not yet tighten the screws (adjustment required, see next step)!

301

Insert COP Box Fixation


(Rear View) (Front View)
Pos. Description
1 Car walls
2 COP Box

15.10.01 Page 347 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Adjust the height of the COP above the car wall level (flush to max. 25 mm
raised) by aligning the level of the COP box in the car wall.
Then tighten the screws in the wall fixings!

302

Adjust COP Box Adjustment Details


(Front View) (Cross Sections)
Pos. Description
1 Car walls
2 COP Box
Dimension, by which COP raises above car wall level (0 mm to
A
25 mm)
COP Car operating panel (only shown for illustration, not yet installed!)

15.10.01 Page 348 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Arm position latches on lock (at top of COP box):

303

Check the COP configuration using the following LONCOP slide switches
(see installation specific schematic diagram for correct values):
Switch Function

MODE

304 Push Button Riser Mode

OUT1/2/3

Door Access Side for Riser

15.10.01 Page 349 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

If there is more than one COP in the car, repeat steps 300 to 304 for all
305
COPs
Route external COP cables to their correct destinations:
l One LONTC of first COP in car + Servitel (connector GNT) to the top of
the car
l One LONTC of every COP to next COP, if applicable

306

Do not yet connect the cables on the OKR side!

15.10.01 Page 350 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Hang panel into respective COP box. The latch on top will snap in with an
audible click:

307

If there is more than one COP in the car, repeat steps 305 to 307 for every
308 COP. Before hanging the panels into the respective COP box, connect the
LONTC cable from the previous COP.
Route the LONTC and Servitel cables from a single / the first COP to the
connectors on the LONIC PCB in the OKR.

309

Do not yet plug in these connectors! This will be done during


commissioning.

K 604328 E Version 01, released - last edited on August 30, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 351 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

MX Fixtures INVENTIO AG
INSTALLATION
© 07/2001

Section 3-2 Name Panel

Procedure No. Step


Print and insert name plates (drawing how to remove plastic cover)
310 Use Word file from diskette, which was delivered with name panel, or download file from Schindler
intranet.

Using a marker, draw vertical lines on the car side wall to mark panel position
(not required if placed beside COP):

311

15.10.01 Page 352 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Drill holes in car side wall using drilling jig (if placed beside COP, align drilling
jig with COP), then fix lower hinge in drilled holes:

312

Pos. Description
1 Vertical position lines for alignment of drilling jig
2 Car side wall
3 Drilling jig delivered with name panel
4 Lower hinge for fixation of panel
5 Name panel (only for illustration, do not yet install)
Remove protective film from adhesive tape on back side of lock mechanism
at upper end of name panel:

313

15.10.01 Page 353 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Set name panel into lower hinge and put it on the wall (the adhesive tape will
keep it on the wall at the upper end):

314

Rear View

15.10.01 Page 354 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Open lock using COP opening tool and remove name panel:

315

15.10.01 Page 355 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Drill holes for attaching lock to car side wall:

316

Attach lock to car side wall:

317

15.10.01 Page 356 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Arm position latches on lock:

318

319 Hang in panel as in steps 314 / 315.

K 604328 E Version 01, released - last edited on August 30, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 357 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

MX Fixtures INVENTIO AG
INSTALLATION
© 07/2001

Section 3-3 Key Switch Back Box

Procedure If key switches are ordered together with the COP, the back box is pre-
installed. These steps are only required, if the key switches are built in later.
No. Step
320 Remove COP using COP opening tool (see also step 315 in Section 3-2).
Remove prepared sheet metal cutout in middle part of COP Box:

321

Insert Key Switch Back Box into cutout and fix it with screws:

322

323 Hang in COP with key switch upgrade according to step 307 in Section 3-1.

K 604328 E Version 01, released - last edited on August 30, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 358 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

MX Fixtures INVENTIO AG
INSTALLATION
© 07/2001

Section 4-1 LOP 85 Flush

Summary The LOP 85 Flush is installed in a cut-out in the door jamb, which provides enough
space even for a LOP with configured key switches.

Procedure No. Step


Check correct floor setting on LONCUS/LONPBD PCB:
Switch Setting

400 Decimal rotary switches for floor position (HIGH: tens, LOW:
HIGH/LOW units)
Bottom floor = 1
ZS1/ZS2 Access side (1 or 2)
401 Route cable into hoistway through cutout in door jamb.
Snap LOP into the door jamb (example: LOP 85 Flush with 1 element):

402

Drawing detail: Snap-in mechanism


Route cable to hoistway cable loom and plug cable into appropriate LON bus
403 system (lift bus LONL or group bus LONG) using the T-connector
See installation specific schematics, if you are not sure whether the LOP is connected to LONL or LONG

K 604328 E Version 01, released - last edited on August 30, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 359 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

MX Fixtures INVENTIO AG
INSTALLATION
© 07/2001

Section 4-2 LOP 85 Surface

Summary The LOP 85 Surface is installed on the wall next to an elevator or between
elevators.

Note !
In case a LOP 85 Surface is configured with one or more key switches, a Key
Switch Wall Box is required.

Procedure No. Step


Check correct floor setting on LONCUS/LONPBD PCB:
Switch Setting

404 Decimal rotary switches for floor position (HIGH: tens, LOW:
HIGH/LOW units)
Bottom floor = 1
ZS1/ZS2 Access side (1 or 2)
Check positioning: new picture with height above floor level (incl. height of
through-hole for cable), distance to elevator (in case of single elevator),
405
recommendation to place LOP in the middle between 2 elevators if group
fixture.

15.10.01 Page 360 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Drill holes for fixation screw and for through-hole (diameter 20 mm) for the
wiring:

406

Pos. Description
1 Upper edge of LOP

2 Upper fixation hole for LOP


Vertical distance from Pos. 1, upper edge: 25 mm

Through hole for


3 l LOP 3 elements with 1/2 elements implemented
l LOP 5 elements with up to 4 elements implemented

4 Through hole for LOP 3 elements with 3 elements implemented


Vertical distance from Pos. 2, fixation hole: 180 mm

5 Through hole for LOP 5 elements with 5 elements implemented


Vertical distance from Pos. 2, fixation hole: 250 mm

Rules for centerline of call buttons in order to fulfill EN81-70:


H l for highest button: max. 1100 mm above floor level
l for lowest button: min. 900 mm above floor level

15.10.01 Page 361 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Insert LOP into upper fixation screw, push it upwards and mark the bottom
holes on the wall:

407

Drill holes, insert anchors:

408

409 Route cables into hoistway via through-hole in the wall

15.10.01 Page 362 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fix LOP with lower fixation screws and install bottom cover:

410

Route cable to hoistway cable loom and plug cable into appropriate LON bus
411 system (lift bus LONL or group bus LONG) using the T-connector
See installation specific schematics, if you are not sure whether the LOP is connected to LONL or LONG

K 604328 E Version 01, released - last edited on August 30, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 363 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

MX Fixtures INVENTIO AG
INSTALLATION
© 07/2001

Section 4-3 LOP 128 Flush

Summary The LOP 128 Flush is installed with a wall box in the wall next to an elevator or
between elevators.

Procedure No. Step


Check correct floor setting on LONCUS/LONPBD PCB:
Switch Setting

413 Decimal rotary switches for floor position (HIGH: tens, LOW:
HIGH/LOW units)
Bottom floor = 1
ZS1/ZS2 Access side (1 or 2)
If not yet done, insert wall box into wall recess and use mechanism on
bottom for vertical alignment:

414

Rules for centerline of call buttons in order to fulfill EN81-70:


l for highest button: max. 1100 mm above floor level
l for lowest button: min. 900 mm above floor level

15.10.01 Page 364 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

415 Route cables into hoistway via through-hole in wall box and wall
Snap LOP onto wall box opening:

416

Route cable to hoistway cable loom and plug cable into appropriate LON bus
417 system (lift bus LONL or group bus LONG) using the T-connector
See installation specific schematics, if you are not sure whether the LOP is connected to LONL or LONG

K 604328 E Version 01, released - last edited on August 30, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 365 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

MX Fixtures INVENTIO AG
INSTALLATION
© 07/2001

Section 4-4 LOP 85 Surface with Wall Box

Summary The Key Switch Wall Box for a LOP 85 Surface must be used, if the LOP is
configured with key switches.

Procedure No. Step


Check correct floor setting on LONCUS/LONPBD PCB:
Switch Setting

417 Decimal rotary switches for floor position (HIGH: tens, LOW:
HIGH/LOW units)
Bottom floor = 1
ZS1/ZS2 Access side (1 or 2)
Prerequisite: wall box be must fixed in wall, so that wall box will include key
switches.
418 Rules for centerline of call buttons in order to fulfill EN81-70:
l for highest button: max. 1100 mm above floor level
l for lowest button: min. 900 mm above floor level

419 Route cables into hoistway via through-hole in wall box and wall

15.10.01 Page 366 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fix LOP on wall box corresponding to Section 4-2 'LOP 85 Surface' (first step
as example in picture below: drill upper fixation hole and insert fixation
screw):

420

Wall box serves as protection for key switches. Fixation of LOP to wall
box not required!
Route cable to hoistway cable loom and plug cable into appropriate LON bus
421 system (lift bus LONL or group bus LONG) using the T-connector
See installation specific schematics, if you are not sure whether the LOP is connected to LONL or LONG

K 604328 E Version 01, released - last edited on August 30, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 367 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

MX Fixtures INVENTIO AG
INSTALLATION
© 07/2001

Chapter 5 Landing Indicator Panels English

Summary The MX Landing Indicator Panel (LIP) is available in two installation variants:
l LIP Flush (flush mounted in the door header, with/without gong)
l LIP Surface (surface mounted on wall above door, with/without gong - in
preparation).

Note ! LIP Z-Line not described here


For control type M10, LIPs Z-Line (Z-Line Car Designation Plates) are required.
Installation of these LIPs is described in a separate document (K 604031) within
the documentation of the Z-Line Fixtures.

LIP Flush The LIP Flush is installed in a cut-out in the center of the door header.
No. Step
Check correct address setting on LONDI/LONDY PCB:
Switch Setting

500 Decimal rotary switches for floor position (HIGH: tens, LOW:
HIGH/LOW units)
Bottom floor = 1
ZS1/ZS2 Access side (1 or 2)
501 Route cable into hoistway through cutout in door jamb.
Snap LIP into the door header (example: LIP Flush with gong):

502

Route cable to hoistway cable loom and plug cable into appropriate LONL
503
bus system using the T-connector

K 604328 E Version 01, released - last edited on August 30, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 368 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Z-Line Fixtures INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION - Landing Elements
© 02/1999

Section 5-2 Terminal without Option Box English

Introduction The Z-Line Terminal for Miconic 10 is surface mounted beside the door.
This procedure describes the installation of the mounting plate for the
terminal. Do not yet connect and install the terminal itself. This is done during
commissioning (see K 604027).

Mounting Plate The terminal is positioned by fixing the mounting plate at the appropriate location
for Terminal on the wall. Generally, Z-Line terminals are installed beside or between doors in a
certain height above floor level. The hoistway cable is routed through the hole in the
middle of the mounting plate.

Dim. Description Meas.

A Height above final floor level1) 1130 mm


(terminal without option box)

B Through-hole in wall for hoistway cable to terminal 30 mm


1) If the final floor covering is not yet in place, please refer to the level of the door sill.
Positioning and Fixation of Terminal Mounting Plate
Despite of these general rules, the terminals must always be positioned to the
locations indicated on the dispo plan.
Version 01, released - last edited on July 20, 2000
K 604026 E Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 369 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Z-Line Fixtures INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION - Landing Elements
© 02/1999

Section 5-3 Terminal with Option Box English

Introduction If the Z-Line Terminal for Miconic 10 is installed together with an option box, the
position of the cutout for the option box and the distance between mounting plate
and wall box must be observed carefully to achieve a neatless fit between the two
stations.
This procedure describes positioning of terminal and option box, the
insertion of the wall box for an option box and the installation of the
mounting plate for the terminal. Installation of the other mounting elements for
the option box is described in chapter 'Option Box'. Do not yet connect and install
terminal and option box. This is done during commissioning (see K 604027).

Preparation with If an option box is installed together with the terminal, the wall box for the option
Option Box box (cutout part of builders work) is the point of reference for positioning the
terminal. The following illustration shows positioning and dimensions of the
prerequisite cutout and of the through-hole for hoistway wiring:

15.10.01 Page 370 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation in
Dim. Description Clad / Plastered Brick,
Masonry, Concrete or Exposed
Concrete, Marble, etc.

A Height of above final floor level1) 1128 mm


(terminal without option box)

Distance between wall cutout for option box (upper


B 176 mm
edge) to through-hole in wall
C Width of wall cutout for option box 113 mm
D Depth of wall cutout for option box min. 104 mm
E Height of wall cutout for option box 158 mm
F Through-hole in wall for hoistway cable to terminal 30 mm
1) If the final floor covering is not yet in place, please refer to the door sill.
Positioning with Option Box
Despite of these general rules, the control stations must always be positioned to the
locations indicated on the dispo plan.

Insert Wall Box Insert and fix the wall box into the wall cutout, which was prepared during builders
work. The wall box must be flush with the finished wall surface or may even
be positioned max. 2 mm in the wall! If the wall cutout had been positioned
wrong during builders work, there is no way to correct this without going back to the
customer, or builder respectively.
Please note, that the dimensions for the placement of option box and terminal in the
dispo plan are heights above final floor level. If the final floor covering is not yet in
place, please refer to the level of the door sill.

15.10.01 Page 371 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation The distance between mounting plate and wall box must be observed carefully to
achieve a neatless fit between the two stations. The respective dimensions are
indicated in the figure below. The hoistway cable is routed through the hole in the
middle of the mounting plate.

Dim. Description Meas.


Distance from inside bottom of wall box to screws below on
A max. 161 mm
terminal mounting plate
B Through-hole in wall for hoistway cable to terminal 30 mm
Positioning and Fixation of Mounting Plate

Use the mounting plate as drilling jig for the fixation holes.
Version 01, released - last edited on August 18, 2000
K 604026 E Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 372 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Z-Line Fixtures INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION - Landing Elements
© 02/1999

Section 5-4 Option Box English

Introduction The Z-Line Option Box for Miconic 10 is recess mounted directly below a Z-Line
Terminal, so that terminal and option box form a unit.
This procedure describes the installation of the mounting elements for the
option box. Do not yet connect and install the option box itself. This is done
during commissioning (see K 604027).
Prerequisite for the installation of the option box is that the wall box has been
prepared according to section 'Terminal with Option Box'.

Mounting The mounting bracket is inserted above into the wall box and the mounting plate
Brackets below as follows:

Insert Mounting Bracket and Mounting Plate


Mounting bracket and mounting plate are fixed to the wall box by screws. The
mounting bracket above must be flush to the wall. For the mounting plate below,
there is a small nose which must be flush to the wall.

15.10.01 Page 373 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fix Mounting Bracket and Mounting Plate


Please note, that the grounding cable must be fixed together with one of the screws
of the upper mounting bracket. It must point to the inside / back side of the wall box.
Version 01, released - last edited on July 04, 2000
K 604026 E Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 374 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Z-Line Fixtures INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION - Landing Elements
© 02/1999

Section 5-5 Car Designation Plate English

Introduction This section contains specific information on installation of the Z-Line Car
Designation Plate for Miconic 10.

Mounting Z-Line car designation plates are generally positioned above the door header,
Bracket for Car horizontally centered to the door, by fixing their mounting plate at the appropriate
Designation location on the wall.
Plate

Dim. Description Meas.

A Height above door 150 mm


(recommended)
Positioning and Fixation of Mounting Bracket
Only in case the floor height is too small to position the car designation plate above
the door, it may be positioned beside the door (upper edge flush with upper edge of
door header).
Despite of the general positioning rules, the elements must always be positioned to
the locations indicated on the dispo plan.

15.10.01 Page 375 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Terminal Now the designation plate is slided on the mounting bracket:


Installation

Slide on the Designation Plate


Be sure to install the different designation plates (A, B, C, etc.) at the correct
elevators according to the dispo plan.
Version 01, released - last edited on July 20, 2000
K 604026 E Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 376 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Z-Line Fixtures INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION - Car Elements
© 02/1999

Section 5-2 Positioning English

Introduction This section shows general rules for the positioning of the Z-Line car elements for
Miconic 10.
This information is for reference purposes only. The hidden box comes always
preinstalled in the middle part of the car operating panel. The cutouts for the
destination indicators are already prepared in the car door jamb (including mounting
frame for flush indicator).

Positioning of
Hidden Box

Z-Line Firefighting Units or Z-Line Terminals are always installed in


a hidden box in the main car operating panel.
This figure shows the position of the hidden box in a D type car
operating panel. The hidden box is integrated in the middle part of
the car operating panel and replaces the call buttons which are no
longer needed due to Miconic 10 operation with destination call.
Top and bottom part of the car operating panel remain unchanged.

Positioning

15.10.01 Page 377 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Positioning of
Destination
Indicators

Both the flush and the raised destination indicators are


installed cutouts which are prepared in the car door
jambs. The indicator middles are for both types in the
same height (dimension C) above the entrance sill. The
indicators should be horizontally centered to the
entrance frame.
The dimensions for positioning can be seen in the
following table:
Dim. Description Flush Raised
A Width of cutout 63 mm 62 mm
B Height of cutout 285 mm 264 mm
Height of center above
C 1755 mm
door sill
D Height of car door jamb HKE
The flush version requires a mounting frame in the
cutout which comes preinstalled. The raised version only
requires the cutout.

Positioning
Version 01, released - last edited on August 18, 2000
K 604031 E Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 378 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Z-Line Fixtures INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION - Car Elements
© 02/1999

Section 5-3 Firefighting Unit English

Introduction This section contains specific information on installation of the Z-Line Firefighting
Unit for Miconic 10 as car operating panel in a hidden box.
This information is for reference purposes only. The firefighting unit in the hidden
box comes always preinstalled in the middle part of the car operating panel.

Fixation The Firefighting Unit is hooked into the back wall of the hidden box with two noses
on one side, pushed with the noses into the slots, and finally tightened with one
screw on the other side:

Fixation of Firefighting Unit in Hidden Box


Version 01, released - last edited on July 04, 2000
K 604031 E Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 379 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Z-Line Fixtures INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION - Car Elements
© 02/1999

Section 5-4 Terminal English

Introduction This section contains specific information on installation of the Z-Line Terminal for
Miconic 10 as car operating panel in a hidden box.
This information is for reference purposes only. The terminal in the hidden box
comes always preinstalled in the middle part of the car operating panel.

Fixation of For the hidden terminal, the standard terminal mounting plate is tightened on the
Mounting Plate back wall of the hidden box:

Insertion of Mounting Plate into Hidden Box

15.10.01 Page 380 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Insertion of Now the Terminal is inserted in the hidden box by pushing it onto the mounting
Terminal plate:

Insertion of Terminal into Hidden Box

15.10.01 Page 381 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Fixation of The terminal is fixed on the mounting plate from behind / below by means of two
Terminal hexagon socket screws:

Fixation of Terminal in Hidden Box


Version 01, released - last edited on August 18, 2000
K 604031 E Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 382 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Z-Line Fixtures INVENTIO AG


COM M ISSIONING - Car Elements
© 02/1999

Chapter 1 Firefighting Unit English

Summary This section contains information on commissioning of the Z-Line Firefighting Unit
as part of a car operating panel. For each firefighting unit in each car, the LON
address of the HTIC PCB(s) may be checked (the unit comes preinstalled in the car
operating panel and should already have the correct settings).
As the unit is factory preset and preinstalled, the procedure described in this
section must only be executed if calls entered on the firefighting unit are not
acknowledged.

Prerequisites The firefighting unit is uninstalled from the hidden box (see document K 604034) to
be able to access the HTIC PCB(s) on the back side. For reinstalling the unit, see
document K 604031.

15.10.01 Page 383 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Setting The addresses of the HTIC PCB(s) are set with the hexadecimal rotary switches
Parameters according to the schematic diagram. Two HTIC PCBs are only required if the unit
has more than two address blocks with 16 floor call buttons each.

Layout of HTIC PCB

For Miconic 10-GC, the HTIC PCBs in each car are connected to the LON lift bus
of the respective elevator control. So the hexadecimal HTIC address values depend
on the values for the TIC PCBs in the same address range:

PCB Address Switches


HIGH = C for all PCBs
First HTIC
(low floor address range 1...32)
LOW = value for last TIC PCB on respective car
operating panel (TC) plus one

Second HTIC HIGH = C for all PCBs


(high floor address range 33...64) LOW = value for the first HTIC PCB plus one
HTIC Address Settings for Miconic 10-GC
For the Miconic 10 Overlay, the HTIC PCBs in the different cars are connected to
the common LON group bus of the control overlay. So the hexadecimal HTIC
address values must be used to distinguish, in which car the Firefighting Units are
located:
PCB Address Switches
HIGH = C for all PCBs
First HTIC
(low floor address range 1...32)
LOW = 0, 2, 4, ..., C, E for units in car A, B, C,
..., G, H
HIGH = C for all PCBs
Second HTIC
(high floor address range 33...64)
LOW = 1, 3, 5, ..., D, F for units in car A, B, C,
..., G, H
HTIC Address Settings for Miconic 10 Overlay

Operational Functionality of the unit in the elevator installation is checked according to the
Check commissioning procedure for the control after the values for all units have been set.
Version 01, released - last edited on August 18, 2000
K 604032 E Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 384 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Z-Line Fixtures INVENTIO AG


COM M ISSIONING - Car Elements
© 02/1999

Chapter 2 Terminal English

Summary This section contains information on commissioning of the Z-Line Terminal as part
of a car operating panel. For each terminal in each car, the parameter for the car
number must be set.

Prerequisites The Miconic 10-GC control or the Miconic 10 Overlay must be operational when
commissioning the terminal. Generally, commissioning of the terminals is executed
as a part of the commissioning procedure for the control (for Miconic 10-GC, see
K 604006; for Miconic 10 Overlay, see , see K 603233 / K 603234).
A complete set of documentation is at hand, consisting of:
 schematic diagram containing the parameters for floor and position number
of each terminal
 technical documentation for installation (technical catalog or extracts from
technical catalog).

Basic The Z-Line Terminal has a number of built-in self-diagnostic features. If the
Operational terminal cannot work in normal mode, the corresponding status code for the
Check reason is indicated on the terminal display:
Status Display Description
This status may only occur during power-up. It indicates that
W1 the initial connection to the LON bus master (Miconic 10-GC
control / Miconic 10 Overlay) could not be established yet
Following to a change of parameters on the control, the new
W2
parameters are downloaded into the terminal
The terminal configuration is defective, riser or floor number
has been changed or the terminal has been moved to
W3
another installation where the configuration parameters do not
match.
When operational, the terminal is periodically communicating with
the LON bus master. If this periodic check message from the
-- control is not received for a time period of max. 120 seconds,
'- -' is displayed, the terminal goes inactive and does not accept
any entry except terminal configuration mode (for diagnostics).
If a destination call from the terminal is not acknowledged
(communication lost, control does not respond), '++' is
displayed, the terminal goes inactive and does not accept any
++
entry except terminal configuration mode (for diagnostics). After
max. 120 seconds, the periodic check fails, and the status
changes to '--'.
Self-diagnostic Terminal Checks

Please note, that a terminal will recognize if is moved to another installation /


elevator! If this is done for diagnostic purposes, the configuration must be changed
twice: when trying to operate the terminal at a different location, and again, when it
is brought back to the original location.

If the check fails, see K 604033 for diagnostics.

15.10.01 Page 385 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Terminal For commissioning the terminal as a car operating panel, the following settings
Configuration in terminal configuration mode are required :
No. Designation Description
Set terminal position for car terminal
- 0: none, landing terminal
TC - 1: TC1, working for access side 1
6 - 2: TC2, working for access side 1
(old: CA)
- 3: TC3, working for access side 2
- 4: TC4, working for access side 2
- 5-8: according to TC1-TC4, yet working for both access sides
For a complete reference of terminal configuration modes see 'Appendix C' of document K 604023
Terminal Configuration Settings

Terminal configuration mode is entered by pressing and holding the keys '*', '-',
and '5' in this sequence (hold the first keys until the last one is pressed). If the
sequence was entered correctly, the terminal will display '?_', and the keys can
be released. Now the number of the desired configuration mode must be
entered (if the time-out for entering the number is reached, the terminal displays
'??', and the procedure must be restarted).
The method to enter configuration mode is Schindler confidential and must
not be passed to anybody outside Schindler!

Setting For each terminal in each car, the settings for terminal position (configuration
Parameters mode 6) must be made according to the schematic circuit diagram.
This is done by entering the value upon the '?_' prompt in configuration mode 6. If
an invalid car number (valid values 1 to 8) is entered, '??' appears on the display,
and the terminal leaves configuration mode and goes back to its normal operation
mode. If the entry is valid, ‘OK’ is displayed and the terminal goes back to normal
operation in car mode.
If '0' was entered, the terminal leaves car mode and exits to landing mode. This
also applies, if the terminal was already in landing mode and floor or position
number were changed.

Operational Functionality of the unit in the elevator installation is checked according to the
Check commissioning procedure for the control after the values for all terminals have been
set.
Version 01, released - last edited on August 18, 2000
K 604032 E Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 386 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Z-Line Fixtures INVENTIO AG


COM M ISSIONING - Car Elements
© 02/1999

Chapter 3 Destination Indicators English

Summary This section contains information on commissioning of the Z-Line Destination


Indicators for Miconic 10 controls. For each destination indicator in each door jamb
of the car, the LON address on the back side of the indicator must be checked (the
unit comes preinstalled in the car door jamb and should already have the correct
settings), then the indicator is installed in the door jamb.

Prerequisites The destination indicator is not yet installed in the door jamb (if already installed,
see document K 604034 for removal) to be able to access the indicator back side.

Settings The indicator address is set with the hexadecimal rotary switch are set according to
the last page of the schematic diagrams (see schematics page 'LON node address
table'). The LON address generally consists of two hexadecimal values. For the
indicators, however, the HIGH value is fixed. So there is only one hexadecimal
rotary switch for the LOW value on each indicator. Valid values for the
hexadecimal rotary switches for the indicators in a car are:
Control LON Address
The individual indicators in each car have the different
addresses 1 to 4 for the max. 4 indicators per car (2 per
Miconic 10-GC door)
(As the indicators in each car are connected to the LON lift bus of the
respective elevator control, the indicator address range can be used to
distinguish the individual indicators in a car)

All individual indicators in each car have the same


address, which is 1 to 8 for the cars A to H
Miconic 10 Overlay (As the indicators in the different cars are connected to the common LON
group bus of the control overlay, the indicator address range must be used to
distinguish, in which car the indicators are located)
LON Address Settings

Electrical The cable from the ICE PCB in the OKR is routed through the cutout in the door
Connection jamb and connected to the back side of the PCB on the back side of the destination
indicator.

15.10.01 Page 387 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of The flush indicator is inserted into the cutout. The magnets on the indicators back
Flush Indicator side will snap onto the brackets of the mounting frame:

Installation of Flush Indicator


It is recommended to place the indicator onto the cutout (tilt indicator) until
commissioning is successfully finished.

15.10.01 Page 388 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of The raised indicator is inserted into the cutout. The snap-on plastic clips on the
Raised Indicator indicators back side will snap the indicator into the cutout:

Installation of Raised Indicator

Operational Functionality of the unit in the elevator installation is checked according to the
Check commissioning procedure for the control after the values for all indicators have
been set.
Version 01, released - last edited on August 18, 2000
K 604032 E Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 389 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Chapter 5 Electrical Installation

Load Measuring Installation of the LMS system: The Car Suspension Point is checked on loading.
System LMS Load measuring system LMS is installed on the U - profile (suspension point ropes).
Loadcell X-130-S04 (S08) is used for measurement of the cars load.
-

Installation of
LMS system

No. Step
Install the Lon interface LONLMS - 3 [2] on the angle LMS [1] by means of
501
four bolts M4x20 with nuts and washers [3].

The fixation of Lon interface LONLMS - 3

Give in the plate LMS cpl. [1] by bolt M12x100. This bolt has to completely
502 screw up and install the Loadcell X-130-S04 (S08) [2] on spring pin in the U -
profile.
After installation of the Loadcell X-130-S04 (S08) it have must be a gap
503 between bolt M12x100 and the U - profile of 2-3 mm. The bolt should not
touch the plate LMS cpl. [1].

15.10.01 Page 390 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

LMS installation

The position for right function LMS

15.10.01 Page 391 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Connect the service cable to the Lon interface LONLMS - 3 from the Loadcell
[2]. Connect through the service cable LONLMDMS from the Lon interface
504
LONLMS - 3 to the building interface box BIB [1]. Description of switch
connection by K 604104 and K 604103.

Connection cables to BIB (LON)


-

15.10.01 Page 392 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

LMS complete

LMS system complete

Lon interface LONLMS - 3

Cable LONLMDMS

15.10.01 Page 393 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Loadcell X-130-S04 (S08)

Pit Ladder The Pit Ladder is used to get in and get out from the pit. The position of the Pit
Ladder is insured by means of limit switch.
The Pit Ladder is supplied in pre-installed condition.
An assembly drawing for the Pit Ladder is document Z 43920000.
-

15.10.01 Page 394 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of Pit 505 Put the ladder [1] to vertically position.


Ladder Limit
Switch Install the limit switch, so [2] that the pulley of the limit switch touches the
506
cam [4].
If the limit switch [2] doesn't touch the cam [4], advance the limit switch in
507 horizontal direction to the cam or level the right position of the limit switch by
positioning the pit ladder with screws by bolts M4x50, washers and nuts [3].
Check up right function of the limit switch [2]. (The clearance between cam
508
[4] and pulley of limit switch [2] - see picture)

The installation of limit switch

Clearance between cam and pulley of the limit switch (see picture). Secure
509
that the safety circuit is connecting (pit ladder - off position)

15.10.01 Page 395 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The clearance between cam and limit switch

Installation of Installation of cable of both oil buffer switches


cable on oil 510 Install the cable to the square tube by means of cable ties.
buffer switch
511 Close the contact of OLEO buffer.
512 The cable of the contact lead in side the groove of the ALU - section.

K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 396 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 6-1 Counterweight

Dimensions of This section describes the basic data of the steel and the lead filler:
filler
BG [mm] 400 450 500 550 600
Dimensions 385x100x30 435x100x30 485x100x30 535x100x30 585x100x30
Mat. No. 56014270 56014271 56014272 56014273 56014274
GGK [kg]
9,07 10,24 11,42 12,60 13,78
(for 1 piece)
Steel filler description

BG [mm] 400 450 500 550 600


Dimensions 385x100x30 435x100x30 485x100x30 535x100x30 585x100x30
Mat. No. 56014281 56014282 56014283 56014284 56014285
GGK [kg]
13,10 14,80 16,50 18,20 19,90
(for 1 piece)
Lead filler description
-

15.10.01 Page 397 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of No. Step


filler to
counterweight After finishing the car with interior, fill in the remaining of filling material
601
to the counterweight frame.
602 Safe fillers against jump by anti jump safety (see picture).

Counterweight full filled

The safety of filling material

Warning In case of using lead filler it is necessary to use protecting gloves.


After finishing the work, give back out numbered lead fillers to the Schindler
company. The company Schindler ecological dispose lead filler.

K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 398 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 6-2 Compensation Chain

Position of This picture describes the position and the dimensions of the compensating chain
compensating fixing [1] at the counterweight [2], the car guide rail A [4] and the counterweight
chain guide rail C [3]:
BGS = Distance between guide rails of counterweight

The position of compensating chain fixing


-

Adjustment of
compensating
chain No. Step
The reel of the compensating chain may be supported using the same
603 equipment used for travelling cables, such as jack stands supporting a steel
bar through the cable reel.
If the chain is being raised, the chain should be pulled off from the bottom of
604 the reel to follow the natural bend in the compensating chain and prevent
reverse bending and twisting (see picture).

The reel raised


A - Pay - off from bottom of reel
B - Rotation

15.10.01 Page 399 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The reel should be positioned as close as possible to the counterweight to


minimize bending in the compensating chain. If the chain is being lowered
605 down into the hoistway, the chain should be pulled from the top of the reel or
coil. When lowering chain down into the hoistway, a brake on the reel is
recommended to prevent it form running free (see picture).

The reel lowered


A - Pay - off from top of reel
B - Rotation

End link preparation


Before installation, the jacket must be removed from at least 11/2 links
of chain on fixing of the counterweight side and 300 - 500 mm on fixing of the
606
car side. This may be accomplished by cutting the jacket with an industrial
razor blade or a sharp knife.
607 Put the end of the compensating chain on the level surface.

The prepare
608 Estimate the needed length of the chain links.

Right adjustment of chain links

15.10.01 Page 400 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Make a cut around the chain jacket, cutting as deep as possible into the
609
interstice of the link.
Make several axial cuts starting at this circumferential cut. (The number of
610
cuts increases with the size of the chain.)
611 Using pliers, peel the strips of jacket from the chain.

The cutting of chain jacket


-

Installation of Put in the compensating chain [1] to the compensating chain fixing cpl. [2]
compensating 612 and tight fast two nuts [3].
chain on fixing Installation of the compensating chain use by document K 601615.

The fixing of compensating chain


-

15.10.01 Page 401 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of The compensating chain is fixed on the tube (D60) with two clips. These clips
compensating 613
are fixed on the bottom car sling.
chain on car
P23K Compensating chain is secured by bolt with nut. Next information by
614
catalogue K604167 and K604166.

Compensating chain fixing of car


-

15.10.01 Page 402 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Loop diameter of
Compensating chain must be hung to retain their natural loop
chain
diameters. The importance of this step cannot be overemphasized. This
615 will cause damage to the chain jacket and may cause the loop to turn out - of
-plane to the right or left causing the car load to become unbalanced. Upon
completion of the installation, the loop must be checked (see picture).
Measure the horizontal distance between the compensating chain about
616
900 mm from the bottom of the loop.
Measure this horizontal distance again about 2000 to 4000 mm from the
617
bottom of the loop.
These two dimensions should be equal (within ± 1 cm). If they are not, the
618 attachment point on the car must be moved to ensure that the chain hanging
from the counterweight is parallel to the chain hanging from the car.

The measurement of loop

K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 403 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

SchindlerEuroLift Hoistway Material INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION < = 1000 kg MRL
© 03/2000

Section 6-3 Counterweight Screen

Layout This section describes the position of the Counterweight Screen to the
Counterweight:

Pos./ Mark Title - description


1 Counterweight CWS
2 Counterweight Screen
BGS Distance between guides of counterweight
TG Depth of counterweight
The position of Counterweight Screen
-

15.10.01 Page 404 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of No. Step


bracket on guide
rail Brackets [1] are supplied in pre - installed condition. Soften nuts [4] and
619
rotate clips [3].
Install brackets [1] by means of clips [3], bolts M8x30 [4], nuts and retaining
620
washer RIP to the counterweight guide rails C, D [2] all over length.

The installation of brackets


-

15.10.01 Page 405 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation of
Counterweight
Screen

Install the bottom part of the screen sheet [1] on the guide rails C, D [4] with
621
brackets [2]. Tight bolts M6 [3].
Level the bottom part of the screen sheet on both sides in face of the
622
counterweight.

The installation of bottom part

Put in two clips [2] to oblong holes, which are on ends of screen, so those
623
ends of clips were in direction to the fitter.
624 Put on and install the middle part of the screen sheet [1]. Tight bolts M6.
625 Bend clip [2] ends in direction together.
Put in two clips [2] to oblong holes, which are on ends of screen, so those
626
ends of clips were in direction to the fitter.
627 Put on and install the upper part of the screen sheet [1]. Tight bolts M6.
628 Bend clip [2] ends in direction together.

15.10.01 Page 406 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

The installation of clips, middle part and upper part


Warning Needed cuttings for the compensating chain and for the car guide rail (A)
fixing should be made during the installation. Use the smallest cuttings as
possible.
-

15.10.01 Page 407 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Assembly of
component

Counterweight Screen - assembly

K 604141 E Last edited on October 11, 2001 / version 02, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 408 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 9-1 Decorate Stakes (Optional)

Summary This section explain how to install and fix decorate stake on the car.
-

Fixing Material

Fixture
-

15.10.01 Page 409 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Assembly

Decorate stake installation


K 604167 E Last edited on October 10, 2001 / version 03, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 410 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 9-2 Kick Plates

Summary This section explain how to install the kick plates on the car.
-

Fixing Material

Kick plates fixture


-

15.10.01 Page 411 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Assembly

Keep 8mm of gap for the passage of the air ( a )

Kick plates installation (version shown : car with deco stake)


K 604167 E Last edited on October 10, 2001 / version 03, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 412 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 9-3 Beams (Optional)


-

Fixing Material

Beams fixture
-

Spots Intall the transformers on the longer beams


(Optional)

Spots installation
-

15.10.01 Page 413 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Wiring for
Spots
(Optional)

Spots wiring
-

Assembly

1. Neopren profil when spots in beam

Beams installation
K 604167 E Last edited on October 10, 2001 / version 03, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 414 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 9-4 Handrails (Optional)

Summary This section explains how to install the handrail.


For disposition on rear wall see K 604166 section 7-5 Handrail
-

Installation
without Mirror

Handrail installation, without mirror

15.10.01 Page 415 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation with
Mirror

Handrail installation, with mirror


K 604167 E Last edited on September 11, 2001 / version 03, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 416 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 9-5 Car Lining (Optional)

Summary This section explains how to install the walls decoration (laminate or mirror) on car
walls.
-

Before sticking panels, walls should be cleaned and streamlined.


-

In Three Parts In three parts for laminate decoration with or without handrail or for mirror
decoration without handrail.

1 = Opposed wall (with decor) or deco stake


2 = Kick plate

Walls decoration installation (in three parts)


-

15.10.01 Page 417 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

In Six Parts In six parts for mirror decoration with handrail.


To fix handrail see section 8-6 Handrail Installation

1 = Opposed wall (with deco) or deco stake


2 = Kick plate
3 = Sheet rail

Walls decoration installation (in six parts)


K 604167 E Last edited on October 10, 2001 / version 03, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 418 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 9-6 Supports for Deco Celing


-

Supports
Disposition

S. Support for deco ceiling


Support disposition
-

Supports
Installation

Supports_installation
-

15.10.01 Page 419 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Detail when
Indirect Light
1. support for deco ceiling
2. supports for deco ceiling, BK
and TK depending, see table
bellow
3. beam
4. indirect light with support

Without Beams With Beams

Detail when indirect light


-

Detail when
Spots in Deco
Ceiling
1. support for deco ceiling
2. supports for deco ceiling, BK
and TK depending, see table
bellow
3. beam
4. transfo.

Without Beams With Beams

Detail when spots in deco ceiling


-

15.10.01 Page 420 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Detail when
Spots in
Beams
1. support for deco ceiling.
2. supports for deco ceiling, BK
and TK depending, see table
bellow
3. beam with spots
4. spot

With Beams

Detail when spots in beams


K 604167 E Last edited on October 10, 2001 / version 03, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 421 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 9-7 Car Light


-

Spots in See Section 9-3 Beams (Optional)


Beams
-

Spots in Deco
BK=900...<1400mm
Ceilling
TK=1000...2100mm TK>2100...2700mm

Wiring for spots in deco ceilling - BK=900...<1400

15.10.01 Page 422 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

BK≥1400...1700mm
TK=1000...2100mm TK>2100...2700mm

Wiring for spots in deco ceilling - BK≥1400...1700

BK>1700...2100mm
TK=1000...2100mm TK>2100...2700mm

Wiring for spots in deco ceilling - BK>1700...2100


-

15.10.01 Page 423 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Indirect Light

Indirect light
K 604167 E Last edited on October 10, 2001 / version 03, released
Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 424 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

CAR P23K INVENTIO AG


INSTALLATION
© 05/2001

Section 9-8 Deco Ceiling


-

D = measure between the COP and the rear wall or front wall,
L = width of a deco ceiling element.

Measure D should be bigger than measure L

Deco ceiling element

15.10.01 Page 425 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Installation Steps Installation overview

Deco ceiling installation

Slide the deco ceiling element forwards or back and install the next element.

K 604167 E Last edited on October 10, 2001 / version 03, released

Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first or title page.

15.10.01 Page 426 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
© 10/2000

Section 4-1 Preparation English

General No. Step Remarks


All of the preceding steps in the complete commissioning
400 See K 604105
procedure have been carried out
The operation of all contacts in the safety circuit must be
tested. KNE contacts must be correctly set.
401 All KUET, KUET1, 2KUET, 2KUET1 (with 2 entrance
sides) magnets as well as switches must be correctly
installed
The counterweight has been set so that with open brakes
402 the car will move upward and with one person in the car,
will move downward
In the elevator control cabinet, check that JH has been
403
turned off

Car LONIC. Plug in the following connectors:


l LUET Car in door zone signal (traveling cable)
l AGSI Absolute encoder
2 connectors:
l 1 plug to ASIX (traveling cable)
404 (See Appendix A-3)
l 1 plug from AGSI
(can be plugged in everywhere)
l KUET Magnetic Switches KUET and KUET1
l 2KUET Magnetic Switches 2KUET and 2KUET1
(with 2 entrance sides)

405 Set JREC switch to position "Normal"

Remark
In case to have the safety circuit closed the car roof must be closed (contact KWL)

Elevator Control ASIX. Plug in the following connectors:


Cabinet 406 l AGSI Absolute encoder (traveling cable) (See Appendix A-1)
l LUET Car in door zone signal (traveling cable)
407 The complete safety circuit must be closed!

K 604106 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 08, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 427 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
© 10/2000

Section 4-2 Carry Out and Verify Measuring Travel English

Positioning the No. Step Remarks


Car
The boot
In the elevator control cabinet, turn on JH sequence takes
408
If necessary reduce Recall Speed (see K 604163) approx. 50
seconds!
Move the car using the recall control station and take
409 note of the signal change from KUET/KUET1 by checking
LED LUET on the ASIX PCB user interface
Position the car in the door zone (KUET) at the topmost
stop (check by watching LED LUET).
Check the display on the ASIX PCB: During the
measuring travel
the elevator
control orients
itself according to
410 the number of
KUET magnets
(PCT).
It is therefore very
important to start
at the topmost
floor!

15.10.01 Page 428 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Note !
During the following steps, the fitter must neither be in the car nor in the hoistway!
Carry Out AS. Turn on the following switches and circuit breakers:
Measuring Travel
411 l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker
l JLC Car lighting switch
(only with MR variants)

In the elevator
412 Set JRH switch to position "Normal"
control cabinet
The Measuring
Travel begins!
Set the following switches on the user interface to the The elevator
correct position: control initializes a
1. JMOF in position "0" measuring travel.
2. JLF in position "1" and then back to position The car travels to
"0" (toggle switch) the bottom stop
and remains there
in the door zone.
413 After relevelling,
the measuring
travel is finished.
The JLF LED on
the user interface
is lit, until the
measuring travel
is completely
finished (and then
goes out)
Check the displays on the user interface (ASIX PCB):

LED Status
not lit
lit
blinks
undefined

414

7-segment display
shows the figure
"1"

Carry out Test 51 (save the LON-Nodes in the GCIOA

15.10.01 Page 429 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

PCB):
After T51 the
415 1. Press “T” and choose T51 with “+/-“
green LED
2. Press “T” again, then press “MA” to go
“LONP” lit.
back
The parameter 59 has to be changed to „0“:

1. Press „P“ Switch off load


416 2. With „+/-„ keys choose 59 measuring
3. Press „P“ again
4. With „+/-„ keys choose „0“
5. Press „P“ again

Important !
If there are Services with high priority configured (see installation schematics) the
Commissioning of the Car- and Lift-IOs must be done first.

Monitoring the On the user interface (ASIX), set switch JKFM to position
Measuring Travel "1"

In JKFM mode the


417 doors remain
closed when
testing Calls

To give calls
using the UI:
Use UI to issue car calls and check that the car travels to 1. Press the
the correct floor "DC" key
2. Use the "+" / "
–" key to
select the
floor and then
confirm by
pressing the
418 "DC" key
3. Use the "+" / "
–" key to
select the
entrance side
and then
confirm by
Check the 7-segment display on the user interface (UI) pressing the
"DC" key
4. The travel will
be started

K 604106 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 29, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 430 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
© 10/2000

Chapter 5 Recall / Inspection Travel English

Summary The following steps describe how to test the function of the recall and inspection
travel.

Remark
In case to have the safety circuit closed the car roof must be closed (contact KWL)

Recall Travel No. Step Remarks


On the user interface (ASIX), set switch JKFM to position
500
"0"
All of the preceding steps in the complete commissioning
501 See K 604105
procedure have been carried out
502 Set JRH switch to position "Recall Control"
Press DRH-D: car must travel downwards In the elevator
503
Press DRH-U: car must travel upwards control cabinet
504 Carry out a recall travel and check the operation of JHM
Attention!
Elevator control
will
505 Set JRH switch to position "Normal" automatically
start a
Correction travel

Inspection Travel On the user interface (ASIX), set switch JRVM to position
506
"1"
The REC/RH LED
on the user
507 Set JREC switch on the OKR to "INSPECTION"
interface (ASIX
PCB) is lit
Press DREC-D: car should travel downwards
508 On car
Press DREC-U: car should travel upwards
Carry out an inspection travel and check the operation of
509
JHC
Attention!
Elevator control
will after 30
510 Set JREC switch to position "Normal" seconds
automatically
start a
Correction travel
On the user interface (ASIX), set switch JRVM to position
511
"0"

K 604106 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 08, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 431 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
© 10/2000

Chapter 6 Car I/O English

Summary The following steps describe how to connect and to check the Car I/O.

Remark
In case to have the safety circuit closed the car roof must be closed (contact KWL)

Preparation No. Step Remarks


All of the preceding steps in the complete commissioning
600 See K 604105
procedure have been carried out
AS. Turn off the following switches and circuit breakers:
l JH Main switch
601 l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker
l JLC Car lighting switch
(only with MR variants)

LONIC. Check that the following connectors have been Communication


602 plugged in: with car operating
l LONTC LON car operating panel(s) panel(s)
(see Appendix A-3)

On car operating panel LONTC1 connector TC1 must be


603
plugged in
When there are several car operating panels, the following
connectors must be plugged in:
l TC1.LONTC and TC2.LONTC
Conn. TC1 with TC2
l TC2.LONTC and TC3.LONTC
604 Conn. TC2 with TC3
l TC3.LONTC and TC4.LONTC
Conn. TC3 with TC4
At the last car operating panel, the alarm button should be
wired to LONIC (OKR) using the cable provided (LONIC;
Connector DA)

15.10.01 Page 432 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Commissioning Check settings on the car operating panel PCB:


Car I/O Check slide switch – COP configuration:
l MODE Row/Sequence See K 604107:
605
l OUT1 Setting ZS1/ZS2 for column 1 "Diagnostics"
l OUT2 Setting ZS1/ZS2 for column 2
l OUT3 Setting ZS1/ZS2 for column 3
AS. Turn on the following switches and circuit breakers: The boot
l JH Main switch sequence takes
606 l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker approx. 50
l JLC Car lighting switch
(only with MR variants)
seconds!

With the
Miconic10
Travel to all floors and check: destination call
l that all car calls are being answered control, these
607
l that the doors function properly (DT-O/DT-S) checks are carried
l that the displays function properly out after
commissioning of
the Lift I/Os

K 604106 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 29, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 433 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
© 10/2000

Chapter 7 Lift I/O English

Summary The following steps describe how to connect and to check the Lift I/O.

Remark
In case to have the safety circuit closed the car roof must be closed (contact KWL)

Preparation No. Step Remarks


All of the preceding steps in the complete commissioning
700 See K 604105
procedure have been carried out
AS. Turn off the following switch:
701
l JH Main switch

With the variant


Out of Service /
Multiplex, LONL
is an internal
ASIX. Plug in the following connector: connection
702
l LONL LON Lift (hoistway cable loom) between ASIX
and LRBPL
(Option Module).
See chapter
"Group Control".
(see Appendix A-1)

Check the LOPs (Landing Operation Panels) and LIPs


See K 604107:
703 (Landing Indicator Panels) settings using the installation
"Diagnostics"
schematics and change settings if necessary

15.10.01 Page 434 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Commissioning AS. Turn on the following switches and circuit breakers:


Lift I/O l JH Main switch The boot
l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker sequence takes
704 l JLC Car lighting switch approx. 50
(only with MR variants)
seconds!
l JHO Main switch for options
(only by Simplex with Out of Service display)

Carry out Test 51 (save the LON-Nodes in the GCIOA


PCB):
After T51 the
705
1. Press “T” and choose T51 with “+/-“ green LED
2. Press “T” again, then press “MA” to go “LONP” lit.
back
Variant Simplex with Out of Service:
l LRBPL; Check supply voltage on 24V connector:
l Pin1: +24 V
DC
706 l Pin2: 0 V
l In the elevator control cabinet, turn off JHO
l LRBPL; Plug in 24V connector (Option Module)
l In the elevator control cabinet, turn on JHO

Travel to all floors and check:


l that all floor calls are being answered
707
l that the doors function properly
l that the displays function properly

K 604106 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 29, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 435 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
© 10/2000

Chapter 8 Completion Work Simplex English

Summary The following steps describe how to connect and to test further components.

Remark
In case to have the safety circuit closed the car roof must be closed (contact KWL)

Procedure No. Step Remarks


All of the preceding steps in the complete commissioning
800 See K 604105
procedure have been carried out
AS. Turn off the following switches and circuit breakers:
l JH Main switch
801 l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker
l JLC Car lighting switch
(only with MR variants)

Check the following functions:


802
l Emergency lighting in the car must come on

LONIC. Plug in the following connectors:


l MVEC Car fan motor
(when available)
l SOA Alarm horn car
803 l TT Telephone wire (traveling cable) (See Appendix A-3)
l GNT To the car operating panel intercom
(when available)
l RAC Connection car relay alarm
(when available)
Close the OKR cover!
AS. Turn on the following switches and circuit breakers: The boot
l JH Main switch sequence takes
804 l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker approx. 50
l JLC Car lighting switch
(only with MR variants)
seconds!

Check the following functions:


805 l When the various alarm buttons are pressed, the
alarm horn must be active (must sound)
Continue with "Overall Commissioning Miconic MX-GC
806 K 604105
with Variodyn VF 22/33BR"

K 604106 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 08, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 436 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

LONLMS-3 INVENTIO AG
COMMISSIONING LONLMS -3 w i t h M X - G C U s e r I n t e r f a c e
01/2001

Chapter 1 Prerequisites English

Parameter Load This document provides the commissioning instructions for LONLMS-3 with Hitch-
Type Plate-DMS (HP_DMS), which is default for SchindlerEurolift®. This parameter can
be changed on the chip card, by MX-GC User Interface (on ASIX3 PCB), or using
CADI GC.
On the MX-GC User interface, the load type parameter setting can be verified or
modified with parameter number 59 (P59, parameter value for HP_DMS = 3).

Tests on User Though there are no special tools required for the commissioning procedure, it is
Interface required to have some knowledge on the usage of the MX-GC User Interface, which
is located on the ASIX3 PCB.
Commissioning of LONLMS-3 requires several tests (settings, checks and status
information). For that purpose, the following test commands will be used during
commissioning, which are available on the User Interface:
No. Name Grouping
80 Set Nominal Load
81 Set Basic Load
Basic commands
82 Set Full Load
83 System check
84 Empty Car Bottom
85 Empty Car Top Hitch-plate related commands
86 Empty Car Middle
87 Empty Test Readjustment
891) Display Status Commissioning status for load measurement
1) The status display shows, which commissioning steps have been executed successfully. See below for a
detailed description.
Tests on User Interface
A test is selected by pressing the 'T' key, and then selecting the test no. with the '+'
and '-' keys.

15.10.01 Page 437 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Commissioning With test no. 89, the current commissioning status of the load measuring system
Status can be displayed.
No. Step
100 Push 'T' and select Test 89 <Display Status> Push 'T' again.
The display will now show a row of vertical bars, that are either in the upper
or lower half of the display. The bars are related to the commissioning steps
1 to 7:
l rightmost bar = step 1 (Test 80)
101 nd bar from right = step 2 (Test 81)
l 2
l etc.
If an individual bar is in the lower half, the related commissioning step has
not yet been completed; if it is in the upper half, the step has been executed.
102 Exit from LMS status display by pressing 'T' again or any other button.
Test 'Display Status'
The following figure shows an example of a commissioning status display (here:
steps 1 and 2 executed, all other steps not):

Sample Commissioning Status

Return Messages After execution of a commissioning step, the display of the User Interface will show
'txx 1' if the command was successful, where 'xx' is the identification number of the
test (see table above).
If no LON connection to the LONLMS system is established, the message
'SPOILED LMS TYPE' (15) will appear.
If a commissioning step could not be completed, an error code will be returned and
shown on the display as 'Eyy', where 'yy' is one of the error numbers as listed in the
table below:
No. Description
1 VCOM TX SPOILED
2 VCOM RX SPOILED
3 TIMEOUT EXPIRED
4 CMMSS ALREADY ACTIVE
5 EEPROM CELL SPOILED
6 DEVICE NOT OK
7 UNKNOWN CMMSS CMD
8 NO EFFECT
9 DEVICE NOT WARM
10 INTERNAL FAILURE
11 BALANCE VALUE NOT OK
12 MULTIPLIER OFFSET
13 FLOOR MISS MATCH
14 MULTIPLIER DEVIATION

15.10.01 Page 438 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

15 SPOILED LMS TYPE


16 BALANCE PARAMETER NOT OK
17 CMMSS STATE NOT OK
18 CMMSS PARA NOT OK
19 SYSTEM NOT OK
20 LON TX SPOILED
21 LON RX SPOILED
22 LM LON TROUBLE
23 LM PEND TROUBLE
24 ADT UNKNOWN CMD
25 ADT READ ERROR
26 ADT WRITE ERROR
27 ADT NO ACCESS
28 ADT NOT READY
29 ADT CMD MISSING
30 ADT RANGE ERROR
31 ADT WRONG DATA
32 ADT RES ERROR
33 ADT EEP ID NOT OK
34 LAST CMS MSG
64 CMS SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE
65 CMS SYS TRIP NOT READY
66 CMS SYS NO TRIP FINISH
67 LAST SYSTEM CMS MSG
Error Codes

K 604280 E Version 01, released - last edited on July 17, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 439 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

LONLMS-3 INVENTIO AG
COMMISSIONING LONLMS -3 w i t h M X - G C U s e r I n t e r f a c e
01/2001

Chapter 2 Preparation English

Preconditions Before starting with the commissioning procedure make sure the load-measuring
device including load measuring box are properly installed and LON communication
is working (Diagnostic LEDs on PCB).

Note !
Steps 0 to 4 should be done with the car on the same floor level!
Be aware that the calibration and therefore the sensitivity of the load measuring
system may be influenced by the way the 'test weights' are distributed over the car
floor.

Step 0 -
No. Step
Preparation
200 Position the car at the floor where the test weight can be loaded.
201 Open the car door.
Switch JRH (Recall control) or JREC (Inspection control) on in order to avoid
202
releveling and closing of the door during the commissioning of LMS.

203 Check current commissioning status with Test 89 <Display Status>


(for a description of Test 89, see 'Chapter 1 - Prerequisites')

K 604280 E Version 01, released - last edited on May 30, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 440 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

LONLMS-3 INVENTIO AG
COMMISSIONING LONLMS -3 w i t h M X - G C U s e r I n t e r f a c e
01/2001

Chapter 3 Basic Setting of Load Measurement English

Summary This section describes how to commission the load measurement using the MX-GC
User Interface (excluding the specific additional settings for LMS on hitchplate).
-

Step 1 - Setting
No. Step
the Nominal
Load 300 Push 'T' and select Test 80 <Nominal Load>; Push 'T' again
301 The nominal load [kg] of the elevator will be displayed; modify if not correct
Use up or down arrow key to change the value [kg], then press 'T'; display
302
shows 'T80 r'
Wait until the display shows a '1' (commissioning step completed) or an error
303
code message (return code from LMS system)
-

Step 2 - Setting
304 Make sure the car is empty
the Basic Load
Push 'T' and select Test 81 <Basic Load>, Push 'T' again. The display shows
305
'T81 r'
Wait until the display shows a '1' or an error code message (return code from
306
LMS system)
-

Step 3 - Setting
307 Load the car with the test weight (40% - 100% of nominal load)
the Full Load
308 Push 'T' and select Test 82 <Full Load>, Push 'T' again.
Use up or down arrow key to modify the value [kg] on the display to match
309
the test load in the car, then press 'T'. The display shows 'T82 r'
Wait until the display shows a '1' or an error code message (return code from
310
LMS system)
-

Step 4 - System
Reduce test weight inside the car (30% - 70% of test weight used for full load
Check 311
test)
312 Select Test 83 <System Check>, Push 'T' again.
Use up or down arrow key to modify the value [kg] on the display to match
313
the test load in the car, then press 'T'. The display shows 'T83 r'
Wait until the display shows a '1' or an error code message (return code from
314
LMS system)
315 Remove the test weight from the car
316 Switch off JRH or JREC

K 604280 E Version 01, released - last edited on May 30, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 441 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

LONLMS-3 INVENTIO AG
COMMISSIONING LONLMS -3 w i t h M X - G C U s e r I n t e r f a c e
01/2001

Chapter 4 Additional Settings for LMS on Hitch Plate English

Summary The following additional steps are required for installations with LMS on hitch plate
(parameter "Load Type" HP_DMS), which is default for SchindlerEurolift®.

Caution !
For LMS on hitch plate, the load measuring system must compensate for position
dependent load variations. Be aware that these tests activate KFM mode
automatically. If commissioning must be interrupted for some reason KFM can
always be deactivated with switch 'JKFM' on the MX-GC User Interface.
-

Step 5 - Empty Car


Bottom No. Step
400 Check if the car is empty
Select Test 84 <Empty Car Bottom>, Push 'T' again. The display shows 'T84
401 r'
(the car will automatically activate KFM mode and make a trip to the bottom floor if required)

Wait until the display shows a '1' or an error code message (return code from
402
LMS system)
-

Step 6 - Empty Car


Top 403 Select Test 85 <Empty Car Top>, Push 'T' again. The display shows 'T85 r'
(the car will automatically activate KFM mode and make a trip to the top floor if required)

Wait until the display shows a '1' or an error code message (return code from
404
LMS system)
-

Step 7 - Empty Car


Middle 405 Select Test 86 <Empty Car Middle> Push 'T' again. The display shows 'T86 r'
(the car will automatically activate KFM mode and make a trip to the middle floor if required)

Wait until the display shows a '1' or an error code message (return code from
406
LMS system)
407 KFM mode is deactivated automatically

K 604280 E Version 01, released - last edited on May 30, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 442 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

LONLMS-3 INVENTIO AG
COMMISSIONING LONLMS -3 w i t h M X - G C U s e r I n t e r f a c e
01/2001

Chapter 5 Readjustment of Empty Car English

Summary This test is provided for readjustment of the load measuring device after drifting of
the load measuring signal. This procedure must be done with empty car. It is not
necessary to repeat steps 3 and 4.

Caution !
In case of load measuring on hitch plate, steps 5 to 7 must be repeated instead. If
this readjustment step is performed nevertheless, the commissioning steps 5-7 are
set to 'not done'.
-

Step 8 - Empty
No. Step
Test
500 Check if the car is empty.
Push 'T' and select Test 87 <Empty test>, Push 'T' again. The display shows
501
'T87 r'
Wait until the display shows a '1' or an error code message (return code from
502
LMS system)
Empty Test

K 604280 E Version 01, released - last edited on July 02, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 443 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
©03/2000

Chapter 3 Final Drive Adjustment English

Summary The elevator is ready for Simplex operation.


-

Required The following conditions must be fulfilled:


Installations l All preceeding steps of "Overall Commissioning Miconic MX-GC with Variodyn
VF22BR/VF33BR" K 604105 have been carried out.
l The elevator has successfully performed a "Measuring Travel".
l The elevator installation has been completed.
l The car has been balanced
(counterweight is equal to car weight + 50 % of nominal load).
l Load measurement system is in operation (for commissioning instruction
document see "Overall Commissioning Miconic MX-GC with Variodyn
VF22BR/VF33BR" K 604105).
l Safety circuit has been checked and is in operation.
-

Leveling No. Step Remarks


Accuracy
300 Copy a "Leveling Accuracy Measurements Log" Appendix A-1
Poor travel comfort: If the leveling accuracy is likely to be "CADI Help"
301 influenced, adjust travel comfort Diagnostics
K 604164
Travel to each floor, measure the leveling accuracy and
302
record the values in the table
Adjust the leveling accuracy of each required floor using
the MX-UI as follows:
Procedure Example for One Floor
1. Press the "KOS" key on MX-UI (activates correction
procedure).
2. Select the floor to be corrected using the "+/-" keys
(floor number).
303 3. Press the "KOS" key again (confirms the selection).
4. Correct the inaccuracy using the "+/-" keys
(unit = mm, e.g. if the car stops too low, correct the
inaccuracy using the "+" key).
5. Press the "KOS" key again (confirms the correction).
For each floor to be adjusted, execute steps 2 to 5
of the procedure example above.
Travel to each floor, measure the leveling (in)accuracy Minimal leveling
304
and if necessary, readjust accuracy ±3 mm
At the end of the leveling accuracy adjustment, press the
"MA" key and check that the display shows as follows:

305

assuming car is at floor 1


-

15.10.01 Page 444 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Comfort ASIX3; MX-UI, adjust the drive parameters if requested Diagnostics


Adjustment K 604164
306
Appendix A-2
Appendix A-4
Adjust the value of "Tacho Factor" for direct floor Diagnostics
307
approach (no creeping travel allowed) K 604164
-

End of Once the adjustment operations have been completed, it Saves the
Commissioning is essential to give the command "EndCo" (End parameters in the
308
Commissioning) which is found at the end of FLASH-EPROM
"Parameters" on GCIOA 360
-

Note !
Continue according to document "Overall Commissioning Miconic MX-GC with
Variodyn VF22BR/VF33BR" K 604105.

K 604163 E Version 01-0, released - last edited on May 18, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 445 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
INVENTIO AG
CH–6052 Hergiswil Servitel 10 (TM2 – TAM) K 603346 E Page 14

SW INSTALLATION S– / C– 1–11.2/2

5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Information
Before making the configuration call please have following information ready:
 the telephone number of the TA–Module
 the location where you are
 the module number of the TA–Module (1..5)
 how many modules are connected to this telephone line
 whether the line comes from a PABX or not
does the PABX need a dial prefix
does the PABX need a delay after the dial prefix
 whether a door signal is connected to the discriminator input or not

5.2 Initial configuration call


If the TA–Module is unconfigured and an alarm is released it goes off–hook without dialing a number but en-
ables the microphone.
It is now possible to dial the number of a control center (or configuration center) with a DTMF pocket dialer
(only works, if the line accepts tone dialing).
The control center will get an alarm from installation 000000000000.
Then the operator switches to the TA–Module configuration program.
With it he can control the voice connection and enter the installation’s parameters.

5.3 Procedure for Initial Configuration Call


5.3.1 Release an Alarm
Press the alarm button for at least 3 seconds.
The TA–Module will go off–hook and the dialtone can be heard.
If this should not work:
– If the Module already is configured, it will dial the programmed number (which may be wrong for this
installation). For the configuration it will be necessary, that the control center calls the TA–Module.
– The telephone line is not available. Check the line tension with a volt meter. It should be about 40..50V.
Check also the connection of the alarm button.
5.3.2 Dial the Number of the Control Center
It should now be possible to dial the number of the control center with a DTMF pocket dialer.
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

Wait until the control center answers and the voice connection is switched on.
If this should not work:
– In cases, where the line accepts pulse dialing only, it will not be possible to dial with a pocket dialer.
For the configuration it will be necessary, that the control center calls the TA–Module.
– If the control center is busy, the TA–Module will go on–hook and you will need to restart the procedure.
– After 3 Minutes, the TA–Module will automatically go on–hook again.
5.3.3 Voice Connection
to third parties.

If the voice path is opened tell the operator, that it is a configuration call.
It might be, that he cannot perform the configuration and will arrange that your number is called back. Give
the operator the information mentioned above.
5.3.4 Parameter Configuration
During parameters setup the voice path will be switched off.
The configuration will take a few minutes.
After successful configuration the operator will enable the voice again and ask for another alarm to test the
settings.

Modification:
Date:
15.10.01 Page 446 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding
INVENTIO AG
CH–6052 Hergiswil Servitel 10 (TM2 – TAM) K 603346 E Page 15

SW INSTALLATION S– / C– 1–11.2/2

6 Tests

6.1 Reset
When connecting the TA–Module to the telephone line a short beep should be heared after a few seconds.

6.2 Alarm
 To release an alarm press the alarm button for at least 3 seconds.
If the TA–Module is configured to have a door signal at the discriminator input, the alarm will be delayed.
If the door opens within this time the alarm will be canceled.

 To bypass the discriminator delay press the alarm button three times short and one time long
( . . . _ / dot: 165..660 ms, space: 165..660 ms, dash: 860..2400 ms)
Remember: The operator at the control center does not see, that it is a test alarm.

6.3 Discriminator Input


 Release an alarm by pressing the alarm button for at least 3 seconds.
 Open the door.
 Wait 2 minutes.
 The TA–Module should not make a call.

6.4 Ring Back


Usually a ring back is made from the control center, but with some DTMF commands it is also possible to
call a cabin from a normal telephone.
If the telephone does not have a #–button an additional DTMF pocket dialer may be used to perform the re-
quired commands.
All commands (except Terminate Call) will be answered with 4 beeps.
The maximum connection time is limited to 3 minutes. After that the TA–Module will automatically go on–hook
again.

Dial
Hook–off the phone and dial the installation’s number.
The installation will answer and a long high–pitch beep can be heard.

Module Selection
any way nor used for manufacturing nor communicated
This design and information is our intellectual property.
It must without our written consent neither be copied in

By default cabin 1 is active. Another cabin can be selected by sending a switch command.
#16x# where x is the desired cabin (module).
If an invalid module is selected, the TA–Module will go on–hook and the number has to be dialed again.

Voice Control
The voice path can be controlled by sending
#21# to enable microphone and speaker
#20# to disable microphone and speaker (required before sending further commands)
to third parties.

Terminate Call
By sending the terminate call command, the TA–Module will go on–hook.
#24# If this command is omitted, the TA–Module will after 3 minutes automatically go on–hook.

Modification:
Date:
15.10.01 Page 447 of 451
SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
© 10/2000

Section 9-1 Commissioning Duplex English

Procedure Unless otherwise indicated, the following steps are valid for both elevator control
cabinets:
No. Step Remarks
All of the preceding steps in the complete commissioning
900 See K 604105
procedure have been carried out
AS. Check that the following switches and circuit
breakers have been turned off:
901 l JH Main switch
l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker
l JHO Main switch for options
ASIX. Check that the following connector is plugged in:
l LONL LON Lift (connection to LRBPL on the
902 (See Appendix A-1)
options module)
l ETHERNET Ethernet connection to the next elevator
LRBPL. Check that the following connectors are plugged
in: Internal
903
l ASIX LON Lift (connection to ASIX) connection in AS
l 24V From power supply unit for options
LRBPL. Check that the following connectors are plugged
in:
l LONL LON Lift (from hoistway cable loom) Internal and
904 l LONG LON Group (from hoistway cable loom) external
(when available) connections
l EBLON LON Group (connection to EBLON on the
ASIX PCB)
ASIX. Check that the following connector is plugged in:
l X1 LON Group (Plug X1 on EBLON PCB, Internal
905
connection to LRBPL on the options connection in AS
module)
Elevator 1:
LRBPL. Check that the following connector is plugged
in:
l LONOUT LON Group (LON Group connection to the
906
next elevator)
LRBPL. Check that the following switch is turned on:
l JBAFG Switch bus termination, open topology
bus

15.10.01 Page 448 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Elevator 2:
LRBPL. Check that the following connector is plugged
907 in:
l LONIN LON Group (LON-Group connection to
previous elevator)
AS. Turn on the following switches and circuit breakers:
l JH Main switch
908
l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker
l JHO Main switch for options
Travel to all floors and check:
l that all floor calls are being answered
909
l that the displays are functioning
l that when active, the group functions are carried out

K 604106 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 08, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 449 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Miconic MX-GC INVENTIO AG


COMMISSIONING
© 10/2000

Section 9-2 Commissioning Multiplex English

Remark
Unless otherwise indicated, the following steps are valid for all elevator control
cabinets
Procedure No. Step Remarks
All of the preceding steps in the overall commissioning
910 See K 604105
procedure have been carried out
AS. Check that the following switches and circuit
breakers have been turned off:
911 l JH Main switch
l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker
l JHO Main switch for options
ASIX. Check that the following connectors are plugged
in:
912 l LONL LON Lift (connection to LRBPL on the (See Appendix A-1)
options module)
l ETHERNET Connection to Ethernet Hub (in AS 1)
LRBPL. Check that the following connectors are plugged
in: Internal
913
l ASIX LON Lift (connection to ASIX) connection in AS
l 24V From power supply unit for options
LRBPL. Check that the following connectors are plugged
in:
l LONL LON Lift (from hoistway cable loom) Internal and
914 l LONG LON Group (from hoistway cable loom) external
(when available) connections
l EBLON LON Group (connection to EBLON on the
ASIX PCB)
ASIX. Check that the following connector is plugged in:
l X1 LON Group (Plug X1 on EBLON PCB, Internal
915
connection to LRBPL on the options connection in AS
module)
Elevator 1 to Elevator n-1:
LRBPL. Check that the following connector is plugged
916 in:
l LONOUT LON Group (LON Group connection to the
next elevator)
Elevator 1:
LRBPL. Check that the following switch is turned on:
917
l JBAFG Switch bus termination, open topology
bus

15.10.01 Page 450 of 451


SchindlerEuroLift  INSTALLATION MRL < 1000 kg with Scaffolding

Elevator 1:
LRBPL. Check that the following connector is plugged
in:
LRBPL and
l 24V Power supply Ethernet Hub
Ethernet Hub are
918 Ethernet Hub. Check that the following connectors are
found on the
plugged in:
options module
l 24V Power supply Ethernet Hub from LRBPL
l ETHERNET Connection to ASIX PCB
l ETHERNET Connection to elevators 2 to n
Elevator 2 to n:
LRBPL. Check that the following connector is plugged
919 in:
l LONIN LON Group (LON-Group connection to
previous elevator)
AS. Turn on the following switches and circuit breakers:
l JH Main switch
920
l SIL Lighting supply circuit breaker
l JHO Main switch for options
Travel to all floors and check:
l that all floor calls are being answered
921
l that the displays are functioning
l that when active, the group functions are carried out

K 604106 E Version 02, released - last edited on August 08, 2001


Use, reproduction, transmittal or disclosure of information in this document is subject to the restrictions on the first / title page.

15.10.01 Page 451 of 451